WO2022151405A1 - 通信方法和装置 - Google Patents

通信方法和装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022151405A1
WO2022151405A1 PCT/CN2021/072284 CN2021072284W WO2022151405A1 WO 2022151405 A1 WO2022151405 A1 WO 2022151405A1 CN 2021072284 W CN2021072284 W CN 2021072284W WO 2022151405 A1 WO2022151405 A1 WO 2022151405A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
information
paged
terminal equipment
group
information field
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2021/072284
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
张战战
铁晓磊
周涵
黄雯雯
花梦
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to PCT/CN2021/072284 priority Critical patent/WO2022151405A1/zh
Priority to CN202180062465.8A priority patent/CN116114327A/zh
Publication of WO2022151405A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022151405A1/zh

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W68/00—User notification, e.g. alerting and paging, for incoming communication, change of service or the like

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication, and in particular, to a communication method and apparatus.
  • the terminal equipment in the radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) idle state or the RRC inactive state mainly performs the following processes: monitoring and paging (paging) physical downlink control channel (physical downlink control channel, PDCCH) and radio resource management (radio resource management, RRM) measurements.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • PDCCH physical downlink control channel
  • RRM radio resource management
  • the network device configures a paging discontinuous reception (DRX) cycle for the terminal device, and the terminal device only needs to perform a paging occasion (PO) (also referred to as a paging occasion, PO) within a paging DRX cycle.
  • Paging time can monitor the paging PDCCH, and can enter the sleep state without monitoring the paging PDCCH at other times.
  • the network device will send paging downlink control information (DCI) at the PO, and the paging DCI will schedule a paging physical downlink shared channel (physical downlink shared channel).
  • DCI downlink control information
  • the paging PDSCH will carry the identity (identity, ID) of the terminal equipment being paged. If the terminal equipment matches its own ID in the received PDSCH, it will confirm that it is being paged; If you match your own ID, you will confirm that you have not been paged.
  • These terminal devices that do not match their own IDs in the paging PDSCH are paging false alarms. It can be seen that it is unnecessary for the terminal device that generates the paging false alarm to receive and decode the PDSCH, resulting in waste of power consumption.
  • the terminal devices monitoring the same PO are further grouped, that is, sub-grouping.
  • sub-grouping For example, in the paging DCI, it is indicated in the paging DCI whether one or more subgroups of terminal equipment monitoring the PO are paged, so that the terminal equipment in the subgroup of terminal equipments that have not been paged can directly enter the sleep state without To continue to receive and decode the paging PDSCH, so that power consumption can be saved.
  • the corresponding bits cannot be used to indicate the grouping of terminal equipment corresponding to other characteristic values, resulting in a waste of bit resources;
  • the proportion of the number of terminal equipment paged at different times in the total number of terminal equipment corresponding to the characteristic value is constantly changing. Therefore, the fixed allocation of bits is not suitable for grouping indications at certain times. of.
  • the present application provides a communication method and apparatus, which can make full use of limited bit signaling resources to perform grouping instructions and reduce resource waste.
  • a communication method comprising: a first terminal device receiving first information and second information, where the first information is used to indicate whether a first terminal device group to which the first terminal device belongs is paged ;
  • the first terminal equipment group is paged
  • the second information is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group are paged
  • the first terminal equipment The subgroup to which it belongs is one of the at least two subgroups
  • the first terminal device determines whether to receive the paging physical downlink shared channel PDSCH or whether to monitor the paging physical downlink control channel PDCCH according to the second information.
  • the second information since the content indicated by the second information is related to the content indicated by the first information, for example, in the case where the first information indicates that the first terminal equipment group is paged, the second information is used to indicate that the first terminal equipment group is paged.
  • the first terminal device can determine whether to receive the paging PDSCH, or determine whether to monitor the paging PDCCH according to the content indicated by the second information, and when the first information indicates the first
  • the second information may not be used to indicate whether at least two subgroups into which the first terminal equipment group is divided are paged, and at this time, the second information may be reserved or used to indicate For other functions, therefore, the signaling resources included in the second information can be more fully utilized, and the waste of signaling resources can be reduced.
  • the first terminal device determines not to receive the PDSCH or determines not to monitor the PDCCH.
  • the second information indicates whether at least two subgroups into which the first terminal equipment group is divided are paged and do not take effect, thus
  • the first terminal device may determine not to receive the paging PDSCH, or determine not to monitor the paging PDCCH, therefore, when the first information and the second information are carried by different channels/signals, the first terminal device may only receive the first information, The waste of power consumption can be reduced by not receiving the second information.
  • the information field corresponding to the first terminal equipment group included in the second information is set to a specific state, which can improve the reliability of PDCCH transmission.
  • the information field corresponding to the first terminal equipment group included in the second information is reserved and can be used to indicate other functions in the future, thereby avoiding Bit signaling resources are wasted, and the utilization rate of signaling resources is improved.
  • the first information is further used to indicate whether the second terminal device group to which the second terminal device belongs is paged.
  • the second information includes a first information field and a second information field
  • the first information field is an information field corresponding to the first terminal device group
  • the first information field is an information field corresponding to the first terminal device group.
  • the second information field is the information field corresponding to the second terminal equipment group; if the first information indicates that the first terminal equipment group is paged, the first information field is used to indicate the first terminal equipment group Whether the included M subgroups are paged; if the first information indicates that the second terminal equipment group is paged, the second information field is used to indicate the N subgroups included in the second terminal equipment group whether to be paged.
  • the second information includes a first information field and a second information field
  • the first information field is an information field corresponding to the first terminal device group
  • the first information field is an information field corresponding to the first terminal device group.
  • the second information domain is the information domain corresponding to the second terminal device group;
  • the first information field is used to indicate whether the M1 subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group are paging
  • the second information field is used to indicate whether the N1 subgroups included in the second terminal equipment group are paged
  • the first information field and the second information field are used to indicate that the Whether the M2 subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group are paged, and the M2 is greater than the M1.
  • the first information field and the second information field included in the second information are used to indicate that the first terminal equipment group is paged and the second terminal equipment group is not paged.
  • M2 subgroups included in the terminal equipment group are paging, because M2 is greater than M1, the number of subgroups into which the paged terminal equipment group is divided is increased, which can reduce the paging false alarm probability of the terminal equipment, and further, can reduce Waste of power consumption of terminal equipment.
  • the first terminal device receives third information, where the third information is used to indicate that the grouping indication of the first terminal device group and the second terminal device group is prioritized level, the grouping indication priority is used to determine the terminal equipment group that is preferentially indicated by the second information grouping;
  • the first terminal device determines whether to receive the paging PDSCH, or determines whether to monitor the paging PDCCH according to the second information, including:
  • the first terminal device determines whether to receive the PDSCH according to the second information and the third information, or determines whether to monitor the paging PDCCH.
  • the grouping indication priorities of the first terminal equipment group and the second terminal equipment group can be pre-defined through the third information indication or protocol, so that the terminal equipment group with higher grouping indication priority is preferentially indicated by grouping, and further Priority is given to reducing the paging false alarm probability of terminal equipment with high group indication priority.
  • a better compromise can be achieved between limited signaling resources and the energy saving effect of the terminal equipment, thereby improving the use efficiency of signaling resources.
  • the grouping indication priorities of the first terminal device group and the second terminal device group are predefined by a protocol.
  • the second information is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group are paged.
  • the second information is used to indicate that the second terminal equipment group includes at least Whether the two subgroups are paged.
  • the first terminal equipment group can be preferentially indicated by grouping, especially for the terminal equipment group that is more sensitive to power consumption, a better compromise can be achieved between the limited signaling resources and the energy saving effect of the terminal equipment, so that the signaling can be improved. Efficiency of resource use.
  • the Pth field included in the first information corresponds to the first terminal equipment group
  • the Qth field corresponds to the second terminal equipment group
  • the P and Q are positive integers
  • the P is less than Q
  • the second information is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group are paged;
  • the second information is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups included in the second terminal equipment group are paged.
  • the second information is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups into which the first terminal equipment group is divided are paged; in the Pth field is a non-target state, if the first terminal equipment group is divided into a non-target state, if the The Q fields are target states, and the second information is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups into which the second terminal equipment group is divided are paged. Therefore, the first terminal equipment group corresponding to the Pth field can be preferentially indicated by grouping, especially for the terminal equipment group that is more sensitive to power consumption, a better compromise can be achieved between the limited signaling resources and the energy saving effect of the terminal equipment. In this way, the use efficiency of signaling resources can be improved.
  • the first terminal device receives fourth information, and if the first information indicates that both the first terminal device group and the second terminal device group are paged,
  • the fourth information is used to indicate an information field corresponding to the first terminal equipment group and an information field corresponding to the second terminal equipment group;
  • the first terminal device determines whether to receive the paging PDSCH, or determines whether to monitor the paging PDCCH according to the second information, including:
  • the first terminal device determines whether to receive the paging PDSCH, or determines whether to monitor the paging PDCCH according to the second information and the fourth information.
  • the network device can send the fourth information used to indicate the information field corresponding to the terminal equipment group, and through the fourth information dynamically indicating the information field corresponding to the terminal equipment group, the paged terminal equipment can be flexibly determined
  • the number of groups of groups can reduce the paging false alarm probability of the terminal equipment, and further, can reduce the waste of power consumption of the terminal equipment.
  • the second information includes a first information field and a second information field, if the first information indicates that both the first terminal equipment group and the second terminal equipment group are paged ,
  • the fourth information indicates that the first information field corresponds to the first terminal device group, and the second information field corresponds to the second terminal corresponding to a device group, the first information field is used to indicate whether the M1 subgroups included in the first terminal device group are paged, and the second information field is used to indicate the N1 subgroups included in the second terminal device group whether the group is paged; or,
  • the fourth information indicates that the first information field and the second information field correspond to the first terminal device group, and the first information field and the second information field is used to indicate whether M2 subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group are paged, and the M2 is greater than the M1.
  • the fourth information when the information field included in the fourth information is in the second state, the fourth information indicates that the first information field and the second information field correspond to the first terminal device group, and the first information field and the first information field correspond to the first terminal device group.
  • the second information field is used to indicate whether the M2 subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group are paged.
  • the second information includes a first information field and a second information field, if the first information indicates that both the first terminal equipment group and the second terminal equipment group are paged ,
  • the fourth information indicates that the first information field corresponds to the first terminal device group, and the second information field corresponds to the second terminal Device group correspondence
  • the first information field is used to indicate whether the M1 subgroups included in the first terminal device group are paged
  • the second information is used to indicate the N1 subgroups included in the second terminal device group. is paged; or,
  • the fourth information indicates that the first information field and the second information field correspond to the first terminal device group, and the first information field and the second information field is used to indicate whether the M2 subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group are paged, and the M2 is greater than the M1; or,
  • the fourth information indicates that the first information field and the second information field correspond to the second terminal device group, and the first information field and the second information field is used to indicate whether N2 subgroups included in the second terminal equipment group are paged, and the N2 is greater than the N1.
  • the fourth information when the information field included in the fourth information is the fourth state or the fifth state, the fourth information indicates that the first information field and the second information field correspond to the first terminal equipment group or the second terminal
  • the device groups correspond, and the first information field and the second information field are used to indicate whether the M2 subgroups included in the first terminal device group are paged or whether the N2 subgroups included in the second terminal device group are paged.
  • the fourth information dynamically indicating the information field corresponding to the terminal equipment group, the number of groups of the terminal equipment group to be paged can be flexibly increased, the paging false alarm probability of the terminal equipment can be reduced, and further, the function of the terminal equipment can be reduced. wasted waste.
  • the second information includes a first information field and a second information field, if the first information indicates that the first terminal equipment group is paged, and the first information Two terminal equipment groups are not paged,
  • the first information field, the second information field and the information field included in the fourth information are used to indicate whether the M3 subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group are paged; or,
  • the first information field and the second information field are used to indicate whether M2 subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group are paged, and the M2 is smaller than the M3; or,
  • the first information field is used to indicate whether the M1 subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group are paged, and the M1 is smaller than the M2; or,
  • the fourth information is used to indicate any one of the following situations:
  • the first information field and the second information field are used to indicate whether the M2 subgroups are paged; or,
  • the first information field is used to indicate whether the M1 subgroups are paged.
  • the first information field, the second information field and the information field included in the fourth information can dynamically indicate that the Whether the at least two subgroups into which the paging first terminal equipment group is divided are paging, can flexibly increase the number of groups of the paging terminal equipment group, can reduce the paging false alarm probability of the terminal equipment, and further, can Reduce the waste of power consumption of terminal equipment.
  • the second information includes a first information field and a second information field, if the first information indicates the first terminal device group and the second terminal device group were not paged,
  • At least one of the first information field, the second information field, and the information fields included in the fourth information is reserved or set to a specific state or used to indicate other functions.
  • the third information is carried in the first downlink control information DCI, or in the first medium access control control unit MAC CE, or in the radio resource control RRC signaling;
  • the fourth information is carried in the second DCI or in the second MAC CE.
  • the paging advance indicator channel/signal carries the first information
  • the paging PDCCH carries the second information
  • the paging advance indicator channel/signal is in the time domain in the Before paging the PDCCH, or the paging advance indicator channel/signal and the paging PDCCH are located in the same time slot or the same subframe; or,
  • the paging advance indicator channel/signal carries the partial information included in the first information and the second information, and the paging PDCCH carries information other than the partial information in the second information.
  • the first information is carried by the paging advance indication channel/signal (such as PEI), and the second information is carried by paging the PDCCH, so that the first terminal device can determine itself in advance according to the indication of the first information in the PEI Whether the terminal equipment group it belongs to is paged to determine whether to monitor the paging PDCCH.
  • the PEI only includes the first information, which can save the signaling overhead of the PEI, help reduce the block error rate of the PEI, and improve the reliability of the PEI.
  • the terminal equipment corresponding to the partial information field can be made to determine in advance whether the terminal equipment subgroup in which it belongs is paged to determine whether Monitor the paging PDCCH. In this way, for a terminal device that is more sensitive to power consumption, it can reduce its paging false alarm probability and at the same time make it know whether it is being paged as soon as possible. When the terminal device determines that it has not been paged, it can return to the deep sleep state as soon as possible, thereby further saving the power consumption of the terminal device.
  • the features of the terminal devices included in the first terminal device group are the same, the features of the terminal devices included in the second terminal device group are the same, and the first terminal device group and The features of the terminal devices included in the second terminal device group are different, and the features include at least one of the following:
  • the type of terminal equipment the sensitivity of the terminal equipment to power consumption, the probability of the terminal equipment being paged.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device monitor the same paging PDCCH at the same paging occasion PO, and/or,
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device listen to the same paging advance indicator channel/signal.
  • a communication method including: a network device sending first information, where the first information is used to indicate whether a first terminal device group to which the first terminal device belongs is paged;
  • the network device sends second information. If the first information indicates that the first terminal device group is paged, the second information is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups included in the first terminal device group are paged. paging.
  • the second information since the content indicated by the second information is related to the content indicated by the first information, for example, in the case where the first information indicates that the first terminal equipment group is paged, the second information is used to indicate that the first terminal equipment group is paged.
  • the first terminal device receives the first information and the second information, it can determine whether to receive the paging PDSCH according to the content indicated by the second information, or determine whether to Monitor the paging PDCCH, and when the first information indicates that the first terminal equipment group is not paged, the second information may not be used to indicate whether the at least two subgroups into which the first terminal equipment group is divided are paged, at this time , the second information can be reserved or used to indicate other functions, therefore, the signaling resources included in the second information can be more fully utilized, and the waste of signaling resources can be reduced.
  • the second information is used to indicate whether the at least two subgroups are paged and The second information does not take effect.
  • the second information indicates whether at least two subgroups into which the first terminal equipment group is divided are paged and do not take effect, thereby
  • the first terminal device can determine not to receive the paging PDSCH, or determine not to monitor the paging PDCCH, which can reduce the waste of power consumption.
  • the first information is further used to indicate whether the second terminal device group to which the second terminal device belongs is paged.
  • the second information includes a first information field and a second information field
  • the first information field is an information field corresponding to the first terminal device group
  • the first information field is an information field corresponding to the first terminal device group.
  • the second information field is the information field corresponding to the second terminal equipment group; if the first information indicates that the first terminal equipment group is paged, the first information field is used to indicate the first terminal equipment group Whether the included M subgroups are paged; if the first information indicates that the second terminal equipment group is paged, the second information field is used to indicate the N subgroups included in the second terminal equipment group whether to be paged.
  • the second information includes a first information field and a second information field
  • the first information field is an information field corresponding to the first terminal device group
  • the first information field is an information field corresponding to the first terminal device group.
  • the second information domain is the information domain corresponding to the second terminal device group;
  • the first information field is used to indicate whether the M1 subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group are paging
  • the second information field is used to indicate whether the N1 subgroups included in the second terminal equipment group are paged
  • the first information field and the second information field are used to indicate that the Whether the M2 subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group are paged, and the M2 is greater than the M1.
  • the first information field and the second information field included in the second information are used to indicate that the first terminal equipment group is paged and the second terminal equipment group is not paged.
  • M2 subgroups included in the terminal equipment group are paging, because M2 is greater than M1, the number of subgroups into which the paged terminal equipment group is divided is increased, which can reduce the paging false alarm probability of the terminal equipment, and further, can reduce Waste of power consumption of terminal equipment.
  • the network device sends third information, where the third information is used to indicate a grouping indication priority of the first terminal device group and the second terminal device group,
  • the grouping indication priority is used to determine the terminal equipment group that is preferentially indicated by the second information grouping.
  • the network device can predefine the grouping indication priorities of the first terminal equipment group and the second terminal equipment group through the third information indication or protocol, so that the terminal equipment group with higher grouping indication priority is preferentially indicated by the grouping indication , and then preferentially reduce the paging false alarm probability of the terminal equipment with high group indication priority.
  • a better compromise can be achieved between limited signaling resources and the energy saving effect of the terminal equipment, thereby improving the use efficiency of signaling resources.
  • the grouping indication priorities of the first terminal device group and the second terminal device group are predefined by a protocol.
  • the second information is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group are paged
  • the second information is used to indicate that the second terminal equipment group includes Whether at least two subgroups are paged.
  • the first terminal equipment group can be preferentially indicated by grouping, especially for the terminal equipment group that is more sensitive to power consumption, a better compromise can be achieved between the limited signaling resources and the energy saving effect of the terminal equipment, so that the signaling can be improved. Efficiency of resource use.
  • the Pth field included in the first information corresponds to the first terminal equipment group
  • the Qth field corresponds to the second terminal equipment group
  • the P and Q are positive integers
  • the P is less than Q
  • the second information is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group are paged;
  • the second information is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups included in the second terminal equipment group are paged.
  • the second information is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups into which the first terminal equipment group is divided are paged; in the Pth field is a non-target state, if the first terminal equipment group is divided into a non-target state, if the The Q fields are target states, and the second information is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups into which the second terminal equipment group is divided are paged. Therefore, the first terminal equipment group corresponding to the Pth field can be preferentially indicated by grouping, especially for the terminal equipment group that is more sensitive to power consumption, a better compromise can be achieved between the limited signaling resources and the energy saving effect of the terminal equipment. In this way, the use efficiency of signaling resources can be improved.
  • the method further includes:
  • the network device sends fourth information. If the first information indicates that both the first terminal equipment group and the second terminal equipment group are paged, the fourth information is used to indicate that the first terminal equipment group and the second terminal equipment group are both paged.
  • the network device can send the fourth information used to indicate the information field corresponding to the terminal equipment group, and through the fourth information dynamically indicating the information field corresponding to the terminal equipment group, the paged terminal equipment can be flexibly determined
  • the number of groups of groups can reduce the paging false alarm probability of the terminal equipment, and further, can reduce the waste of power consumption of the terminal equipment.
  • the second information includes a first information field and a second information field. If the first information indicates that both the first terminal equipment group and the second terminal equipment group are paged,
  • the fourth information indicates that the first information field corresponds to the first terminal device group, and the second information field corresponds to the second terminal corresponding to a device group, the first information field is used to indicate whether the M1 subgroups included in the first terminal device group are paged, and the second information field is used to indicate the N1 subgroups included in the second terminal device group whether the group is paged; or,
  • the fourth information indicates that the first information field and the second information field correspond to the first terminal device group, and the first information field and the second information field is used to indicate whether M2 subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group are paged, and the M2 is greater than the M1.
  • the fourth information when the information field included in the fourth information is in the second state, the fourth information indicates that the first information field and the second information field correspond to the first terminal device group, and the first information field and the first information field correspond to the first terminal device group.
  • the second information field is used to indicate whether the M2 subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group are paged.
  • the network equipment dynamically indicates the information field corresponding to the terminal equipment group through the fourth information, which can flexibly increase the number of groups of the terminal equipment group to be paged, can reduce the paging false alarm probability of the terminal equipment, and further, can reduce the number of terminal equipment groups. waste of power consumption.
  • the second information includes a first information field and a second information field. If the first information indicates that both the first terminal equipment group and the second terminal equipment group are paged,
  • the fourth information indicates that the first information field corresponds to the first terminal device group, and the second information field corresponds to the second terminal Device group correspondence
  • the first information field is used to indicate whether the M1 subgroups included in the first terminal device group are paged
  • the second information is used to indicate the N1 subgroups included in the second terminal device group. is paged; or,
  • the fourth information indicates that the first information field and the second information field correspond to the first terminal device group, and the first information field and the second information field is used to indicate whether the M2 subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group are paged, and the M2 is greater than the M1; or,
  • the fourth information indicates that the first information field and the second information field correspond to the second terminal device group, and the first information field and the second information field is used to indicate whether N2 subgroups included in the second terminal equipment group are paged, and the N2 is greater than the N1.
  • the fourth information indicates that the first information field and the second information field correspond to the first terminal equipment group or the second terminal
  • the device groups correspond, and the first information field and the second information field are used to indicate whether the M2 subgroups included in the first terminal device group are paged or whether the N2 subgroups included in the second terminal device group are paged.
  • the network equipment dynamically indicates the information field corresponding to the terminal equipment group through the fourth information, which can flexibly increase the number of groups of the terminal equipment group to be paged, can reduce the paging false alarm probability of the terminal equipment, and further, can reduce the number of terminal equipment groups. waste of power consumption.
  • the second information includes a first information field and a second information field, if the first information indicates that the first terminal device group is paged, and the first information Two terminal equipment groups are not paged,
  • the first information field, the second information field and the information field included in the fourth information are used to indicate whether the M3 subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group are paged; or,
  • the first information field and the second information field are used to indicate whether M2 subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group are paged, and the M2 is smaller than the M3; or,
  • the first information field is used to indicate whether the M1 subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group are paged, and the M1 is smaller than the M2; or,
  • the fourth information is used to indicate any one of the following situations:
  • the first information field and the second information field are used to indicate whether the M2 subgroups are paged; or,
  • the first information field is used to indicate whether the M1 subgroups are paged.
  • the first information field, the second information field and the information field included in the fourth information can dynamically indicate that the Whether the at least two subgroups into which the paging first terminal equipment group is divided are paging, can flexibly increase the number of groups of the paging terminal equipment group, can reduce the paging false alarm probability of the terminal equipment, and further, can Reduce the waste of power consumption of terminal equipment.
  • the second information includes a first information field and a second information field, if the first information indicates the first terminal device group and the second terminal device group were not paged,
  • At least one of the first information field, the second information field, and the information fields included in the fourth information is reserved or set to a specific state or used to indicate other functions.
  • the third information is carried in the first downlink control information DCI, or in the first medium access control control unit MAC CE, or in the radio resource control RRC signaling;
  • the fourth information is carried in the second DCI or in the second MAC CE.
  • the paging advance indicator channel/signal carries the first information
  • the paging PDCCH carries the second information
  • the paging advance indicator channel/signal is in the time domain at Before the paging PDCCH, or the paging advance indicator channel/signal and the paging PDCCH are located in the same time slot or the same subframe; or,
  • the paging advance indicator channel/signal carries the partial information included in the first information and the second information, and the paging PDCCH carries information other than the partial information in the second information.
  • the first information is carried by the paging advance indicator channel/signal (such as PEI), and the second information is carried by paging the PDCCH, so that after receiving the PEI, the first terminal device can to determine in advance whether the terminal equipment group in which it belongs is paged, so as to determine whether to monitor the paging PDCCH.
  • the first terminal device determines not to monitor the paging PDCCH, it may not need to monitor the paging PDCCH, and returns to a deep sleep state, thereby further saving the power consumption of the terminal device.
  • the PEI only includes the first information, which can save the signaling overhead of the PEI, help reduce the block error rate of the PEI, and improve the reliability of the PEI.
  • the terminal equipment corresponding to the partial information field can be made to determine in advance whether the terminal equipment subgroup in which it belongs is paged, so as to determine whether Monitor the paging PDCCH.
  • the terminal device can reduce its paging false alarm probability and at the same time make it know whether it is being paged as soon as possible.
  • the terminal device determines that it has not been paged, it can return to the deep sleep state as soon as possible, thereby further saving the power consumption of the terminal device.
  • the features of the terminal devices included in the first terminal device group are the same, the features of the terminal devices included in the second terminal device group are the same, and the first terminal device group and The features of the terminal devices included in the second terminal device group are different, and the features include at least one of the following:
  • the type of terminal equipment the sensitivity of the terminal equipment to power consumption, and the paging probability of the terminal equipment.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device monitor the same paging PDCCH at the same paging occasion PO, and/or,
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device listen to the same paging advance indicator channel/signal.
  • a communication device is provided.
  • the communication device has the function of implementing the behavior in the method embodiment of the first aspect.
  • the functions can be implemented by hardware, or can be implemented by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware includes one or more modules corresponding to the above functions.
  • the communication apparatus includes: a transceiver module, configured to send first information, where the first information is used to indicate whether the first terminal equipment group to which the first terminal equipment belongs is paged.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to send second information. If the first information indicates that the first terminal equipment group is paged, the second information is used to indicate that the first terminal equipment group includes at least two subgroups. Whether the group is paged.
  • These modules can perform the corresponding functions in the method examples of the first aspect. For details, please refer to the detailed descriptions in the method examples, which will not be repeated here.
  • a communication device is provided, and the beneficial effects can be referred to the description of the second aspect and will not be repeated here.
  • the communication device has a function to implement the behavior in the method example of the second aspect above.
  • the functions can be implemented by hardware, or can be implemented by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above functions.
  • the communication apparatus includes: a transceiver module, configured to receive first information and second information, where the first information is used to indicate whether the first terminal device group to which the first terminal device belongs is paging.
  • the communication apparatus further includes: a processing module configured to store an instruction, if the first information indicates that the first terminal equipment group is paged, the second information is used to indicate that the first terminal equipment group includes Whether the at least two subgroups are paged is used to determine whether to receive the paging PDSCH, or to determine whether to monitor the paging PDCCH according to the second information.
  • a processing module configured to store an instruction, if the first information indicates that the first terminal equipment group is paged, the second information is used to indicate that the first terminal equipment group includes Whether the at least two subgroups are paged is used to determine whether to receive the paging PDSCH, or to determine whether to monitor the paging PDCCH according to the second information.
  • a communication apparatus is provided, and the communication apparatus may be the terminal device in the above method embodiments, or a chip provided in the terminal device.
  • the communication device includes a communication interface, a processor, and optionally, a memory.
  • the memory is used to store computer programs or instructions, and the processor is coupled to the memory and the communication interface, and when the processor executes the computer program or instructions, the communication apparatus executes the method executed by the terminal device in the above method embodiments.
  • a communication apparatus is provided, and the communication apparatus may be the network device in the above method embodiment, or a chip provided in the network device.
  • the communication device includes a communication interface and a processor, and optionally, a memory.
  • the memory is used to store computer programs or instructions, and the processor is coupled to the memory and the communication interface, and when the processor executes the computer program or instructions, the communication apparatus executes the method performed by the network device in the above method embodiments.
  • a computer program product comprising: computer program code, when the computer program code is executed, the method performed by the terminal device in the above aspects is executed.
  • a computer program product comprising: computer program code, when the computer program code is executed, the method performed by the network device in the above aspects is executed.
  • the present application provides a chip system, where the chip system includes a processor for implementing the functions of the terminal device in the methods of the above aspects.
  • the chip system further includes a memory for storing program instructions and/or data.
  • the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the present application provides a chip system, where the chip system includes a processor for implementing the functions of the network device in the methods of the above aspects.
  • the chip system further includes a memory for storing program instructions and/or data.
  • the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, where a computer program is stored in the computer-readable storage medium, and when the computer program is executed, the method executed by the terminal device in the above aspects is implemented.
  • the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, where a computer program is stored in the computer-readable storage medium, and when the computer program is executed, the method executed by the network device in the above aspects is implemented.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a wireless communication system applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a terminal device monitoring the paging PDCCH at its paging occasion.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of bits allocated to terminal devices with the same characteristics provided by this application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of the ratio of the number of paged terminal devices to the total number of terminal devices with a certain characteristic value at different times, according to the feature of device type, provided by the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a terminal device monitoring a paging PDCCH at a paging occasion according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of another communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • LTE long term evolution
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • duplex duplex
  • 5G fifth generation mobile communication systems
  • new radio new radio, NR
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a wireless communication system 100 suitable for an embodiment of the present application.
  • the wireless communication system 100 may include one or more network devices, for example, the network device 10 shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the wireless communication system 100 may also include one or more terminal devices, for example, the terminal device 20, the terminal device 30, the terminal device 40 and the like shown in FIG. 1 .
  • FIG. 1 is only a schematic diagram, and the communication system may also include other network devices, such as core network devices and wireless relay devices (also referred to as wireless backhaul devices), which are not shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the number of network devices and terminal devices included in the mobile communication system.
  • the terminal device 20, the terminal device 30, and the terminal device 40 in the embodiments of the present application may also be referred to as terminals, terminal devices, mobile stations (mobile station, MS), and mobile terminals (mobile terminal, MT). Wait.
  • the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application may be a mobile phone (mobile phone), a tablet computer (Pad), a computer with a wireless transceiver function, and may also be applied to virtual reality (VR), augmented reality (AR) ), industrial control, self driving, remote medical, smart grid, transportation safety, smart city and smart home ) in scenarios such as wireless terminals.
  • the aforementioned terminal devices and chips applicable to the aforementioned terminal devices are collectively referred to as terminal devices. It should be understood that the embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific technology and specific device form adopted by the terminal device.
  • the network device 10 in this embodiment of the present application may be a device for communicating with terminal devices, and the network device may be a base station, an evolved node B (eNB, eNB), a home base station, or wireless fidelity (WIFI)
  • the access point (AP), wireless relay node, wireless backhaul node, transmission point (TP) or transmission and reception point (TRP) in the system, etc. can also be an NR system
  • the gNB in the BS or it can also be a component or a part of equipment that constitutes a base station, such as a centralized unit (central unit, CU), a distributed unit (distributed unit, DU) or a baseband unit (baseband unit, BBU), etc.
  • the specific technology and specific device form adopted by the network device are not limited.
  • the network device may refer to the network device itself, or may be a chip applied in the network device to complete the wireless communication processing function.
  • a terminal device or a network device includes a hardware layer, an operating system layer running on the hardware layer, and an application layer running on the operating system layer.
  • This hardware layer includes hardware such as central processing unit (CPU), memory management unit (MMU), and memory (also called main memory).
  • the operating system may be any one or more computer operating systems that implement business processing through processes, such as a Linux operating system, a Unix operating system, an Android operating system, an iOS operating system, or a Windows operating system.
  • the application layer includes applications such as browsers, address books, word processing software, and instant messaging software.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not specifically limit the specific structure of the execution body of the methods provided by the embodiments of the present application, as long as the program that records the codes of the methods provided by the embodiments of the present application can be executed to provide the methods provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • the execution subject of the method provided by the embodiment of the present application may be a terminal device or a network device, or a functional module in the terminal device or network device that can call and execute a program.
  • various aspects or features of the present application may be implemented as a method, apparatus, or article of manufacture using standard programming and/or engineering techniques.
  • article of manufacture encompasses a computer program accessible from any computer readable device, carrier or medium.
  • computer-readable storage media may include, but are not limited to: magnetic storage devices (eg, hard disks, floppy disks, or magnetic tapes, etc.), optical disks (eg, compact discs (CDs), digital versatile discs (DVDs) ), etc.), smart cards and flash memory devices (eg, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), cards, stick or key drives, etc.).
  • various storage media described herein may represent one or more devices and/or other machine-readable storage media for storing information.
  • the term "machine-readable storage medium” may include, but is not limited to, wireless channels and various other media capable of storing, containing, and/or carrying instructions and/or data.
  • first, second and third in the embodiments of the present application are only for distinction, and should not constitute any limitation to the present application.
  • first information and second information in the embodiments of this application represent information transmitted between a network device and a terminal device.
  • predefinition and the like may be implemented by pre-saving corresponding codes, tables, or other methods that can be used to indicate relevant information in devices (for example, including terminal devices and network devices).
  • the present application does not limit its specific implementation manner, for example, the preset rules and preset constants in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the base station is used as the network device, and the communication process of the side link between at least two terminal devices and the communication process of the uplink between the terminal device and the base station will be as follows:
  • the terminal device may be any terminal device in a wireless communication system that has a wireless connection relationship with one or more network devices. It can be understood that any terminal device in the wireless communication system can implement wireless communication based on the same technical solution. This application does not limit this.
  • the terminal device may be in an RRC active (active) state, an RRC inactive (inactive) state, or an RRC idle (idle) state.
  • the terminal equipment in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state mainly performs the following procedures: monitoring and paging PDCCH and RRM measurement.
  • the network device configures a paging discontinuous reception (DRX) cycle for the terminal device, and the terminal device only needs to monitor the paging PDCCH at one paging occasion (PO) within one paging DRX cycle, that is, However, at other times, it can enter the sleep state without monitoring the paging PDCCH.
  • DRX paging discontinuous reception
  • the process for the terminal equipment to monitor the paging PDCCH includes: the terminal equipment monitors the paging PDCCH at its own PO, and the PDCCH used to carry the paging DCI is called the paging PDCCH here. If the paging DCI carried by the paging PDCCH indicates that there is a paging message, the terminal device will receive and parse the corresponding PDSCH, and the PDSCH scheduled by the paging PDCCH may be referred to as the paging PDSCH.
  • the paging PDSCH carries paging messages, and the paging DCI also includes some paging messages, such as short messages.
  • the terminal device If the terminal device does not blindly detect DCI when paging the PDCCH, or blindly detects the paging DCI, but the paging DCI indicates that no PDSCH is scheduled, the terminal device considers that there is no paging message, and enters the sleep state until one paging DRX cycle After the next paging occasion, the terminal device wakes up again to monitor the paging PDCCH.
  • the PO monitored by the terminal device is related to the ID of the terminal device, so different terminal devices may monitor different POs or the same PO.
  • the ID of the terminal device may also be referred to as UE_ID.
  • the terminal device can calculate the corresponding PO according to the information of the semi-static configuration of the network device and the formula predefined in the protocol, that is, calculate the time domain position at which to monitor the paging PDCCH.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a terminal device monitoring and paging PDCCH at its paging occasion.
  • a terminal device monitors the paging PDCCH at its own PO calculated within a DRX cycle.
  • the DRX cycle 1.28s
  • a paging frame includes 2 POs.
  • the 10 terminal equipments of terminal equipment 1 to terminal equipment 10 monitor the paging PDCCH at PO1, and after a period, the terminal equipment 1 to the terminal equipment 10 will monitor the paging PDCCH at PO3.
  • the information about the semi-static configuration of the network device includes:
  • N The number N of paging frames included in each paging DRX cycle T (note that N is not directly configured, but deduced from configuration information);
  • Paging frame offset PF_offset used to calculate paging frames.
  • the PO monitored by the terminal device may be related to the ID of the terminal device.
  • 5G-S-TMSI 5G SAE-temporary mobile subscription identifier
  • the frame number (SFN) of the radio frame (radio frame) of the terminal device monitoring the paging PDCCH can be determined by the formula (1):
  • SFN represents the frame number of the radio frame in which the terminal device monitors the paging PDCCH
  • PF_offset represents the paging frame offset of the paging frame used by the terminal device for calculation
  • T represents the paging DRX cycle
  • (SFN+PF_offset) mod T represents (SFN+PF_offset) is divided by T to get the remainder
  • N represents the number of paging frames included in each paging DRX cycle T
  • div represents the division operation
  • T div N represents the value obtained by dividing T by N
  • UE_ID represents the terminal equipment ID
  • (UE_ID mod N) indicates that the ID of the terminal device is divided by N and the remainder is obtained.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device calculates the paging frame (frame number: SFN) used to monitor the paging PDCCH, if a PF only includes one PO, the terminal device can monitor the one PO. If a paging frame includes For multiple POs, the terminal device determines to monitor the (i_s+1)th PO, and i_s is determined by formula (2):
  • i_s floor(UE_ID/N)mod Ns (2)
  • UE_ID/N represents the value obtained by dividing UE_ID by N
  • floor(UE_ID/N) represents the rounding down of UE_ID/N
  • Ns represents the number of paging occasions in each paging frame.
  • the terminal device confirms the PO to be monitored according to its own UE_ID. Therefore, different end devices may be mapped to the same or different POs.
  • the same terminal device will be mapped to the same paging frame.
  • Ns POs are further included. Therefore, if the i_s calculated by multiple terminal devices mapped to the same paging frame are also the same, then these multiple terminal devices will be mapped to the same PO. As shown in UE1 to UE10 in FIG. 2 , these 10 terminal devices all monitor PO1.
  • the network device will send a paging DCI at the PO, and the paging DCI will schedule a paging PDSCH.
  • the paging PDSCH will carry the ID of the terminal device being paged. If the terminal device matches its own ID in the received PDSCH, it confirms that it is paged; if the terminal device does not match its own ID in the paging PDSCH , then confirm that you are not being paged.
  • These terminal devices that do not match their own IDs in the paging PDSCH are paging false alarms. It can be seen that it is unnecessary for the terminal device that generates the paging false alarm to receive and decode the PDSCH, resulting in waste of power consumption.
  • a main method at present is to further group the terminal devices monitoring the same PO, that is, sub-grouping. For example, in the paging DCI, it is indicated in the paging DCI whether one or more subgroups of terminal equipment monitoring the PO are paged, so that the terminal equipment in the subgroup of terminal equipments that have not been paged can directly enter the sleep state without To continue to receive and decode the paging PDSCH, so that power consumption can be saved.
  • a molecular group method is to calculate based on UE_ID. For example, the terminal equipment monitoring the same PO is further divided into M subgroups, then the sub-group ID (sub-group ID) where the terminal equipment is located is determined by formula (3):
  • Sub-group ID UE_ID mod M (3)
  • Sub-group ID represents the identification of the subgroup where the terminal device is located
  • M represents the number of subgroups that are divided for the terminal device monitoring the same PO
  • UE_ID mod M represents the ID of the terminal device taking the remainder of M.
  • the method of subgrouping based on UE_ID will group terminal devices with different power consumption sensitivity (PCS)/device type/paging probability into the same subgroup, and it is impossible to distinguish the terminal devices that are sensitive to power consumption. Whether to be woken up, this is not conducive to power consumption-sensitive terminal devices to save power consumption.
  • PCS power consumption sensitivity
  • the present application considers grouping terminal devices monitoring the same PO based on one or more features, so that the terminal devices with the same feature value are divided into the same group, and the terminal devices with the same feature value are further divided into multiple subgroups.
  • the characteristic may be one of the following: PCS, device type, or paging probability.
  • different terminal devices may have different feature values.
  • the paging probability of terminal equipment 1 is equal to P1
  • the paging probability of terminal equipment 2 is equal to P2
  • the paging probability of terminal equipment 3 is equal to P1
  • P1 is not equal to P2
  • the terminal device 2 and the terminal device 1 have different eigenvalues.
  • the device type of terminal device 1 is NR eMBB UE
  • the device type of terminal device 2 is NR RedCap UE, and so on.
  • the present application is also applicable to terminal devices monitoring the same PO having the same feature value for a certain feature.
  • the terminal devices monitoring the same PO are divided into multiple groups, and then each group is further divided into multiple subgroups.
  • FIG. 3 it is a schematic diagram of bits allocated to terminal devices with the same characteristics provided by the present application.
  • terminal devices monitoring the same PO are divided into device type 1 and device type 2 based on the device type, and are further divided into M1 subgroups and M2 subgroups respectively.
  • Q1 bits are fixedly allocated to device type 1 to indicate the paged terminal device subgroup in the corresponding M1 subgroups.
  • the Q2 bits are fixedly allocated to device type 2 to indicate the paged terminal device subgroup in the corresponding M2 subgroups.
  • the corresponding bits cannot be used to indicate the grouping of terminal equipment corresponding to other characteristic values, resulting in a waste of bit resources;
  • the proportion of the number of terminal equipment paged at different times in the total number of terminal equipment corresponding to the characteristic value is constantly changing. Therefore, the fixed allocation of bits is not suitable for grouping indications at certain times. of.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of the ratio of the number of paged terminal devices to the total number of terminal devices with a certain characteristic value at different times and for the feature of device type provided by the present application.
  • the device type has a feature value of 1 and a feature value of 2, that is, two device types of device type 1 and device type 2 are considered.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of the proportion of the number of terminal devices paged at time 1 to the number of total terminal devices corresponding to a certain feature value;
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram at time 2.
  • (c) in Figure 4 is the number of paged terminal devices at time 3.
  • bit resources allocated to device type 1 cannot be used for grouping indications for terminal devices corresponding to other eigenvalues. , resulting in a waste of the bit resource.
  • the ratio of the number of paged terminal devices in device type 1 and device type 2 is small. At this time, it is necessary for the terminal devices of both device types to perform grouping indication. Yes, the paging false alarm probability of the terminal equipment under each equipment type can be reduced respectively.
  • the present application provides a communication method, which can make full use of limited bit signaling resources to perform grouping instructions and reduce waste of resources.
  • the method 500 may be executed by a network device and a terminal device, or may also be executed by a chip in the network device and a chip in the terminal device.
  • the communication method 500 may include:
  • the network device sends first information, where the first information is used to indicate whether the first terminal device group to which the first terminal device belongs is paged.
  • the network device sends second information, if the first information indicates that the first terminal device group is paged, the second information is used to indicate at least two subgroups included in the first terminal device group whether to be paged.
  • the steps 510-520 may be performed by the network device 10 in FIG. 1 .
  • the first terminal device receives first information and second information, where the first information is used to indicate whether the first terminal device group to which the first terminal device belongs is paged.
  • the second information is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group are paged, and the first terminal equipment group is paged.
  • the subgroup to which the terminal device belongs is one of the at least two subgroups, and the first terminal device determines, according to the second information, whether to receive the paging physical downlink shared channel PDSCH, or determine whether to monitor the paging physical downlink control channel PDCCH.
  • the steps 530-540 may be performed by any of the terminal devices 20-40 in FIG. 1 .
  • the network device may send two pieces of information to the first terminal device, and the content indicated by the second information may be determined according to the content indicated by the first information. For example, if the first information indicates that the first terminal equipment group to which the first terminal equipment belongs is paged, the second information is used to indicate that at least two subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group are paged. Correspondingly, after receiving the first information and the second information, the first terminal device may determine whether to receive the PDSCH, or determine whether to monitor the PDCCH according to the content indicated by the second information.
  • the first terminal device determines whether the received PDSCH is a PDSCH used to carry paging messages, and the first terminal device determines whether the monitored PDCCH is a PDCCH used to carry paging DCI, that is, the PDCCH used to schedule the PDSCH .
  • the at least two subgroups included in the first terminal device group in the embodiment of the present application may be understood as: at least two subgroups into which the first terminal device group is divided.
  • the M subgroups, M1 subgroups, M2 subgroups or M3 subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group hereinafter can also be understood as: the first terminal equipment group is divided into M subgroups, M1 subgroups, M2 subgroups respectively.
  • Subgroups or M3 subgroups; and N subgroups, N1 subgroups, and N2 subgroups included in the second terminal equipment group hereinafter can also be understood as: N subgroups and N1 subgroups into which the second terminal equipment group is divided respectively. , N2 subgroups.
  • the first terminal device group is divided into two subgroups, namely, subgroup 1 and subgroup 2, wherein the first terminal device belongs to subgroup 1. If the first information indicates that the first terminal device group is paged, and the second information indicates that subgroup 1 is paged, the first terminal device may determine that the subgroup it belongs to is paged, and determine to receive the paging PDSCH, or Determine to monitor the paging PDCCH; if the first information indicates that the first terminal device group is paged, and the second information indicates that the subgroup 1 is not paged, the first terminal device can determine that the subgroup it belongs to is not paged, And it is determined not to receive the paging PDSCH, or it is determined not to monitor the paging PDCCH.
  • the second information since the content indicated by the second information is related to the content indicated by the first information, for example, in the case where the first information indicates that the first terminal equipment group is paged, the second information is used to indicate that the first terminal equipment group is paged.
  • the first terminal device can determine whether to receive the paging PDSCH, or determine whether to monitor the paging PDCCH according to the content indicated by the second information, and when the first information indicates the first
  • the second information may not be used to indicate whether at least two subgroups into which the first terminal equipment group is divided are paged, and in this case, the second information may be reserved or It is used to indicate other functions. Therefore, the signaling resources included in the second information can be used more fully, and the waste of signaling resources can be reduced.
  • the second information is used to indicate whether the at least two subgroups are paged and all If the second information does not take effect, the first terminal device determines not to receive the PDSCH or determines not to monitor the PDCCH.
  • the function of the second information is also applicable to indicating at least two subgroups included in the first terminal device group Whether it is paged, but the second message does not take effect.
  • the first terminal device may determine not to receive the PDSCH, or determine not to monitor the PDCCH.
  • the first information indicates that the first terminal equipment group is not to be paged, regardless of the content indicated by the second information, the first terminal equipment According to only the first information, it may be determined not to receive the PDSCH, or to determine not to monitor the PDCCH.
  • the first terminal device may ignore the second information, the network device may determine and send the second information according to the fact that at least two subgroups into which the first terminal device group is divided have not been paged, or the network device may not be based on the first terminal device group.
  • the divided at least two subgroups are not paging to determine and send the second information.
  • the second information may be set to an arbitrary bit state according to the implementation of the network device.
  • the first terminal device group includes two subgroups, namely, subgroup 1 and subgroup 2, wherein the first terminal device belongs to subgroup 1. If the first information indicates that the first terminal device group is not paged, the first terminal device may determine that the subgroup to which it belongs is not paged, and determine not to receive the paging PDSCH, or determine not to monitor the paging PDCCH. The second information is used to indicate that neither subgroup 1 nor subgroup 2 is paged, but the second information does not take effect.
  • the second information may include one or more information fields, and when the second information includes multiple information fields, the second information ineffective means that the at least two sub-fields used to indicate that the first terminal device group is divided.
  • the information field of whether the group is paged does not take effect, and does not affect other information fields, that is to say, other functions indicated by the second information still take effect.
  • the first terminal device determines not to receive the PDSCH or determines not to monitor the PDCCH.
  • the information field corresponding to the first terminal device group included in the second information is set to a specific state or reserved.
  • the first terminal device may determine not to receive the PDSCH, or determine not to monitor the PDCCH.
  • set to a specific state or reserved in this embodiment of the present application can be understood as: in the case where the first information indicates that the first terminal equipment group is not to be paged, the second information includes and the first The information field corresponding to a terminal equipment group is not used to indicate whether the at least two subgroups into which the first terminal equipment group is divided are paged, but "set to a specific state or reserved".
  • Specific states may be predefined by the protocol. The purpose of setting an information field to a specific state is to improve the reliability of PDCCH transmission and reduce the bit error rate. The UE can judge whether the parsed DCI is a false alarm DCI according to the information field.
  • the UE may consider the parsed DCI as a false alarm DCI, is the error message.
  • the information field "reserved" indicates that the information field currently does not carry any function and can be used to indicate other functions in the future.
  • the second information indicates whether at least two subgroups into which the first terminal equipment group is divided are paged and do not take effect, thereby
  • the first terminal device may determine not to receive the paging PDSCH, or determine not to monitor the paging PDCCH, therefore, when the first information and the second information are carried by different channels/signals, the first terminal device may only receive the first information, The waste of power consumption can be reduced by not receiving the second information.
  • the information field corresponding to the first terminal equipment group included in the second information is set to a specific state, which can improve the reliability of PDCCH transmission.
  • the information field corresponding to the first terminal equipment group included in the second information is reserved and can be used to indicate other functions in the future, thereby avoiding Bit signaling resources are wasted, and the utilization rate of signaling resources is improved.
  • the first information can be used to indicate whether the first terminal equipment group to which the first terminal equipment belongs is paged. In actual scenarios, the first information can also indicate whether other terminal equipment groups are paged. For details, please refer to below.
  • the first information is further used to indicate whether the second terminal device group to which the second terminal device belongs is paged.
  • the features of the terminal devices included in the first terminal device group and the second terminal device group in the embodiments of the present application may be different, the features of the terminal devices included in the first terminal device group are the same, and the terminal devices included in the second terminal device group features are the same.
  • the features of the terminal devices included in the first terminal device group and the second terminal device group may also be the same, which is not limited.
  • the features of the two terminal devices are the same or different, which refers to one or some features of the terminal devices, and does not mean that all the features of the terminal devices are the same or different.
  • the features in this embodiment of the present application may include the type of the terminal device, the sensitivity of the terminal device to power consumption (power consumption sensitivity, PCS), and the paging probability of the terminal device.
  • NR UE also includes enhanced mobile broadband terminal equipment (enhanced mobile broadband UE) , eMBBUE), ultra-reliable low-latency communication terminal equipment (ultra reliable low latency communication UE, URLLC UE).
  • enhanced mobile broadband terminal equipment enhanced mobile broadband UE
  • eMBBUE enhanced mobile broadband terminal equipment
  • ultra-reliable low-latency communication terminal equipment ultra reliable low latency communication UE
  • URLLC UE ultra reliable low latency communication
  • NR normal/legacy UEs or normal UEs include eMBBUEs, or include URLLC UEs, or include eMBB and URLLC UEs, without limitation .
  • RedCap UE Compared with normal/legacy UE, RedCap UE has higher requirements on battery life. That is, RedCap UEs are more sensitive to power consumption.
  • RedCap UE mainly includes 3 kinds of devices, wearables, industrial wireless sensors and video surveillance. The battery life requirements of these three devices are shown in Table 1 below.
  • the first terminal equipment group to which the first terminal equipment belongs and the second terminal equipment group to which the second terminal equipment belongs may be the RedCap UE group and the normal UE group.
  • UE group That is: the first terminal equipment group may be a RedCap UE group and the second terminal equipment group may be a normal UE group; or, the first terminal equipment group may be a normal UE group and the second terminal equipment group may be a RedCap UE group.
  • the RedCap UE group in this embodiment of the present application may be a group formed by RedCap UEs
  • the normal UE group may be a group formed by normal UEs.
  • terminal devices that are sensitive to power consumption may be grouped into a group, which may be referred to as a power consumption-sensitive group; terminal devices that are not sensitive to power consumption may be grouped into a group, which may be referred to as a power-insensitive group.
  • the first terminal equipment group and the second terminal equipment group are respectively a power consumption sensitive group and a power consumption insensitive group. That is, the first terminal equipment group may be a power consumption sensitive group and the second terminal equipment group may be a power consumption insensitive group; or, the first terminal equipment group may be a power consumption insensitive group and the second terminal equipment group may be a power consumption sensitive group Group.
  • the sensitivity of terminal equipment to power consumption can be divided into multiple levels, such as PCS level 1 and PCS level 2, then the first terminal equipment group and the second terminal equipment group are PCS level 1 and PCS level 2 respectively.
  • the corresponding terminal device group That is: the first terminal equipment group can be the terminal equipment group corresponding to PCS level 1 and the second terminal equipment group can be the terminal equipment group corresponding to PCS level 2; or, the first terminal equipment group can be the corresponding terminal equipment group of PCS level 2
  • the terminal equipment group and the second terminal equipment group are terminal equipment groups corresponding to PCS level 1.
  • the above-mentioned division of the power consumption sensitivity level of the terminal device is only for illustration, and in some embodiments, it may also be divided into three or four or other levels, which are not limited.
  • terminal devices with the same or similar paging probability may be grouped into one group, for example, terminal devices (such as mobile phones, etc.) with paging probability P1 are divided into subgroup 1, and terminals with paging probability P2 are divided into subgroup 1.
  • Devices such as industrial wireless sensors are divided into subgroup 2.
  • the first terminal equipment group and the second terminal equipment group are subgroup 1 and subgroup 2 respectively. That is, the first terminal device group may be subgroup 1 and the second terminal device group may be subgroup 2; or, the first terminal device group may be subgroup 2 and the second terminal device group may be subgroup 1.
  • the first information can be used to indicate whether the first terminal device group to which the first terminal device belongs is paged, and can also be used to indicate whether the second terminal device group to which the second terminal device belongs is paged.
  • the second information is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group and/or the second terminal equipment group are paged.
  • the second information includes a first information field and a second information field, the first information field is an information field corresponding to the first terminal device group, and the second information field is an information field corresponding to the second terminal device group information field;
  • the first information field is used to indicate whether the M1 subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group are paging
  • the second information field is used to indicate whether the N1 subgroups included in the second terminal equipment group are paged
  • the first information field and the second information field are used to indicate that the Whether the M2 subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group are paged, and the M2 is greater than the M1.
  • the first terminal equipment group and the second terminal equipment group are respectively a RedCap UE group and a normal UE group as an example, assuming that the first terminal equipment group is a RedCap UE group, and the second terminal equipment group is a normal UE group .
  • the first information field corresponding to the RedCap UE group is used to indicate whether the M1 subgroups included in the RedCap UE group are paged, and the first information field corresponding to the RedCap UE group is used for paging.
  • the second information field is used to indicate whether the N1 subgroups included in the normal UE group are paged.
  • the first information field is used to indicate the 10 subgroups included in the RedCap UE group.
  • the second information field is used to indicate whether the 10 subgroups included in the normal UE group are paged.
  • the first information field corresponding to the RedCap UE group and the second information field corresponding to the normal UE group indicate that the RedCap UE group includes Whether or not M2 subgroups are paged.
  • the first information field and the second information field may indicate whether the M2 subgroups included in the RedCap UE group are paged. .
  • the number of bits included in the first information field and the second information field is generally more than the number of bits included in the first information field, in other words, the number of subgroups that the RedCap UE group can include is greater than The number of subgroups included in the RedCap UE group in case 1 of the above method 1.
  • the RedCap UE group includes 10 subgroups
  • the RedCap UE group may include 20 subgroups
  • the first information field and the second information field may indicate the RedCap UE group Whether the included 20 subgroups are paged.
  • the first information field and the second information field included in the second information are used to indicate that the first terminal equipment group is paged and the second terminal equipment group is not paged.
  • M2 subgroups included in the terminal equipment group are paging, because M2 is greater than M1, the number of subgroups into which the paged terminal equipment group is divided is increased, which can reduce the paging false alarm probability of the terminal equipment, and further, can reduce Waste of power consumption of terminal equipment.
  • the first information field and the second information field may be set to a specific state or is reserved or used to indicate other functions.
  • both the first information field and the second information field may be set to a specific state or reserved Or used to indicate other functions; or, one of the first information field and the second information field is set to a specific state, and the other is reserved; or, one of them is set to a specific state, and the other is used to indicate other functions ; alternatively, one of them is reserved and the other is used to indicate other functions.
  • the second information includes a first information field and a second information field
  • the first information field is an information field corresponding to the first terminal device group
  • the second information field is the the information field corresponding to the second terminal device group
  • the first information field is used to indicate whether the M subgroups are paged
  • the second information field is used to indicate whether the N subgroups into which the second terminal equipment group is divided are paged.
  • the first terminal equipment group and the second terminal equipment group as a RedCap UE group and a normal UE group respectively, if the first information indicates that the RedCap UE group is paged, it is assumed that the RedCap UE group includes 10 subgroups.
  • the first information field is used to indicate whether the 10 subgroups included in the RedCap UE group are paged; if the first information indicates that the normal UE group is paged, assuming that the normal UE group includes 10 subgroups, the second information field is used to indicate Whether the 10 subgroups included in the normal UE group are paged.
  • the first information field is used to indicate whether the M subgroups are is paged; if the first information indicates that the second terminal equipment group is paged, regardless of whether the first terminal equipment group indicates to be paged, the second information field is used to indicate the N subgroups whether to be paged.
  • the information field included in the first information and the information field included in the second information may be pre-configured by a network device, or pre-defined by a protocol, for example, the number of bits in the information field, and the difference between the information fields and different information fields. Correspondence between terminal device groups or subgroups.
  • the number of terminal equipment groups indicated by the first information above is only an exemplary illustration, and may also be used to indicate more than 3 terminal equipment groups, for example, 4 or 5 terminal equipment groups, which are not limited.
  • the communication method 500 may further include:
  • the network device sends third information to the first terminal device, where the third information is used to indicate a grouping indication priority of the first terminal device group and the second terminal device group, and the grouping indication priority is used to determine The terminal equipment group indicated by the second information packet is given priority.
  • the first terminal device receives the third information.
  • the first terminal device determines whether to receive the paging PDSCH according to the second information, or determines whether to monitor the paging PDCCH, including: the first terminal device determines according to the second information and the third information. Whether to receive the PDSCH, or determine whether to monitor the paging PDCCH.
  • the network device may send third information to the first terminal device for indicating the priority of the grouping indication of the first terminal device group and the second terminal device group, and the first terminal device may The third information and the above-mentioned second information determine whether to receive the paging PDSCH, or determine whether to monitor the paging PDCCH.
  • the grouping indication priorities of the first terminal equipment group and the second terminal equipment group are predefined by a protocol.
  • the protocol predefines the grouping indication of the RedCap UE group to have a higher priority than the Normal UE group.
  • the third information is used to indicate the priority of the grouping indication of the first terminal equipment group and the second terminal equipment group, which may also be referred to as: the third information is used to configure the first terminal equipment group and the second terminal equipment group
  • the grouping of indicates the priority and is not restricted.
  • the third information may be carried in RRC signaling and semi-statically configured by the network device.
  • the third information may be carried in the first DCI or the first MAC CE and dynamically indicated by the network device.
  • the third information when carried in the first DCI, it may be located in the same DCI as the first information and/or the second information, or in a different DCI.
  • the grouping indication priorities of the first terminal equipment group and the second terminal equipment group can be pre-defined through the third information indication or protocol, so that the terminal equipment group with higher grouping indication priority is preferentially indicated by grouping, and further Priority is given to reducing the paging false alarm probability of terminal equipment with high group indication priority.
  • a better compromise can be achieved between limited signaling resources and the energy saving effect of the terminal equipment, thereby improving the use efficiency of signaling resources.
  • the second information is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group are paged.
  • the second information is used to indicate that the second terminal equipment group includes at least Whether the two subgroups are paged.
  • the present application still takes the example that the first terminal equipment group and the second terminal equipment group are the RedCap UE group and the normal UE group respectively. It is assumed that the first terminal equipment group is the RedCap UE group and the second terminal equipment group is the normal UE group.
  • the second information is carried by the DCI, the second information includes an information field (for example, the one information field may include 4 bits), the number of bits of the information field and the bit position of the information field in the DCI can be determined by Semi-static configuration of network devices.
  • the second information is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups included in the RedCap UE group are paged. In this case, regardless of whether the normal UE group is paged, the second information is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups included in the RedCap UE group are paged.
  • the second information is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups included in the normal UE group are paged. Since the priority of the grouping indication of the RedCap UE group is higher than that of the normal UE group, in the case where the RedCap UE group is not paged, if the normal UE group is paged, the second information can be used to indicate that the normal UE group includes at least two Whether the subgroup is paged.
  • the first terminal equipment group can be preferentially indicated by grouping, especially for the terminal equipment group that is more sensitive to power consumption, a better compromise can be achieved between the limited signaling resources and the energy saving effect of the terminal equipment, so that the signaling can be improved. Efficiency of resource use.
  • the second information includes an information field.
  • the second information may also include 2 information fields, referred to as a first information field and a second information field (exemplarily, the first information field and the second information field may respectively include 2 bits) , respectively corresponding to the first terminal equipment group and the second terminal equipment group.
  • the first information domain and the second information domain may be semi-statically configured by the network device.
  • the protocol predefines the grouping indication priority of the first terminal equipment group is higher than that of the second terminal equipment group, then:
  • the first information field and the second information field are used to indicate whether the at least two subgroups into which the first terminal equipment group is divided are paging; or,
  • the first information field and the second information field are used to indicate the Whether at least two subgroups into which the second terminal equipment group is divided are paged.
  • the protocol predefines the grouping indication priority of the first terminal equipment group equal to the second terminal equipment group, then:
  • the first information field is used to indicate at least two subgroups into which the first terminal equipment group is divided Whether to be paged, the second information field is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups into which the second terminal equipment group is divided are paged; or,
  • the first information field is used to indicate that the first terminal equipment group is divided Whether the at least two subgroups of the first terminal equipment group are paged, or the first information field and the second information field are used to indicate whether the at least two subgroups into which the first terminal equipment group is divided are paged; or,
  • the second information field is used to indicate that the second terminal equipment group is divided Whether at least two subgroups of the second terminal equipment group are paged, or the first information field and the second information field are used to indicate whether the at least two subgroups into which the second terminal equipment group is divided are paged.
  • the third information takes effect immediately, that is, acts on the second information in the same DCI.
  • the third information takes effect on the second information in the subsequent DCI, and the third information takes effect until the terminal device receives the next information. until the third information.
  • the terminal device determines the grouping indication priority of the first terminal device group and the second terminal device group according to the current third information.
  • the first information may also be used to indicate whether the first terminal equipment group, the second terminal equipment group and the third terminal equipment group are paged, and accordingly, the second information may be based on the information indicated by the first information.
  • the content indicates whether or not the subgroups included in these 3 terminal devices are paged.
  • the priority of the grouping indication of the first terminal equipment group is higher than that of the second terminal equipment group
  • the priority of the grouping indication of the second terminal equipment group is higher than that of the third terminal equipment group.
  • the first information field, the second information field and the third information field included in the second information are used to indicate whether the subgroup included in the first terminal equipment group is paged .
  • the first information domain is an information domain corresponding to the first terminal device
  • the second information domain is an information domain corresponding to the second terminal device group
  • the third information domain is an information domain corresponding to the third terminal device group.
  • the first information field, the second information field and the third information field are used to indicate that the second terminal equipment group includes Whether the subgroup is paged; or, the first information and second information fields are used to indicate whether the subgroup included in the first terminal equipment group is paged, and the third information field is reserved or set to a specific state.
  • the first information field, the second information field and the third information field are used to indicate the first information field, the second information field and the third information field. Whether the subgroups included in the three terminal equipment group are paged.
  • the number of terminal equipment groups indicated by the above-mentioned first information is only an exemplary illustration, and may also be used to indicate more than 3 terminal equipment groups, for example, 4 or 5 terminal equipment groups, which are not limited.
  • the information field included in the first information is pre-defined by the protocol or semi-statically configured by the network device, and the fields respectively corresponding to the first terminal device group and the second terminal device group in the information domain included in the first information.
  • the protocol is pre-defined or the network equipment is semi-statically configured according to a certain sequence.
  • the first indicates that the paged terminal equipment group is given priority to be grouped, and the latter indicates that the paged terminal equipment group is not grouped.
  • the second information is used for Indicates whether at least two subgroups into which the group of terminal devices previously indicated to be paged are divided are paged. For example, the order of precedence is from left to right (or right to left) according to the position of the fields in the DCI. The following is an example in the order from left to right according to the position of the fields in the DCI.
  • the P th field included in the first information corresponds to the first terminal equipment group
  • the Q th field corresponds to the second terminal equipment group
  • the P and Q are positive integers
  • the P is less than Q. It should be understood that if P is less than Q, it is considered that the P-th field is in front of the Q-th field in DCI, and if Q is less than P, it is considered that the Q-th field is in front of the P-th field in DCI. Here, it is taken as an example that P is less than Q.
  • the second information is used to indicate whether the at least two subgroups into which the first terminal equipment group is divided are paged; or,
  • the second information is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups into which the second terminal equipment group is divided are paged.
  • the P th field and/or the Q th field in this embodiment of the present application may include 1 bit or multiple bits, etc., which is not limited.
  • the P-th field and the Q-th field both include 1 bit
  • the P-th field is the target state (eg, the P-th field is set to "1")
  • the second information is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups into which the first terminal equipment group is divided are paged.
  • the P-th field is a non-target state (for example, the P-th field is set to "0") and the Q-th field is a target state (for example, the Q-th field is set to "1"), it can be considered that the first terminal equipment group If not paged and the second terminal equipment group is paged, the second information is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups into which the second terminal equipment group is divided are paged.
  • the Pth field and the Qth field both include 2 bits
  • the Pth field is the target state (for example, the Pth field is set to "00)
  • the second information is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups into which the first terminal equipment group is divided are paged.
  • the P-th field is a non-target state (for example, the P-th field is set to "01" or “10” or “11") and the Q-th field is a target state (for example, the Q-th field is set to "00"), Then it can be considered that the first terminal equipment group is not paged and the second terminal equipment group is paged, and the second information is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups into which the second terminal equipment group is divided are paged.
  • target state and non-target state may be predefined by a protocol, or semi-statically configured by a network device.
  • target state and/or non-target state may include one state value, or multiple state values, which are not limited.
  • the target state includes 3 state values, which are "01", “10” and “11”, and the non-target state includes 1 state value, which is " 00".
  • the Pth field includes 1 bit
  • the Qth field includes 2 bits
  • the target state corresponding to the Pth field is "1”
  • the non-target state is "0”
  • the target state corresponding to the Qth field is "1”.
  • the state includes three state values, which are "01”, “10” and "11”
  • the non-target state includes one state value, which is "00”.
  • the information field included in the second information may be set to a specific state or reserved or used to indicate other functions.
  • the second information is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups into which the first terminal equipment group is divided are paged; in the Pth field is a non-target state, if the first terminal equipment group is divided into a non-target state, if the The Q fields are target states, and the second information is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups into which the second terminal equipment group is divided are paged. Therefore, the first terminal equipment group corresponding to the Pth field can be preferentially indicated by grouping, especially for the terminal equipment group that is more sensitive to power consumption, a better compromise can be achieved between the limited signaling resources and the energy saving effect of the terminal equipment. In this way, the use efficiency of signaling resources can be improved.
  • the first information may also be used to indicate whether the first terminal equipment group, the second terminal equipment group and the third terminal equipment group are paged, and accordingly, the second information may be based on fields included in the first information The status of indicates whether the subgroups included in these 3 terminal devices are paged.
  • the Pth field included in the first information corresponds to the first terminal equipment group
  • the Qth field corresponds to the second terminal equipment group
  • the Rth field corresponds to the third terminal equipment
  • the P, Q, and R are positive.
  • the P is less than Q
  • the Q is less than R.
  • the second information is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group are paged;
  • the second information is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups included in the second terminal equipment group are paged;
  • the second information is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups included in the third terminal device group are paging.
  • the P-th field and the Q-th field both include 1 bit
  • the P-th field is the target state (eg, the P-th field is set to "1")
  • the second information is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group are paged.
  • the P-th field is a non-target state (for example, the P-th field is set to "0") and the Q-th field is a target state (for example, the Q-th field is set to "1"), it can be considered that the first terminal equipment group If the second terminal equipment group is not paged and the second terminal equipment group is paged, regardless of the state of the Qth field, the second information may be used to indicate whether at least two subgroups included in the second terminal equipment group are paged.
  • the P-th field and the Q-th field are non-target states (for example, the P-th field and the Q-th field are set to "0") and the R-th field is the target state (for example, the R-th field is set to "1" ), then it can be considered that neither the first terminal equipment group nor the second terminal equipment group is paged and the third terminal equipment group is paged, then the second information can be used to indicate at least two subgroups included in the third terminal equipment group whether to be paged.
  • the communication method 500 may further include:
  • the network device sends fourth information. If the first information indicates that both the first terminal equipment group and the second terminal equipment group are paged, the fourth information is used to indicate that the first terminal equipment group and the second terminal equipment group are both paged.
  • the first terminal device receives the fourth information.
  • the first terminal device determines whether to receive the paging PDSCH according to the second information, or determines whether to monitor the paging PDCCH, including: the first terminal device according to the second information and the fourth The information determines whether to receive the paging PDSCH, or whether to listen to the paging PDCCH.
  • the network device may send fourth information to the first terminal device for indicating information fields corresponding to the first terminal device group and the second terminal device group respectively, where the first information indicates the first terminal device
  • the fourth information can be used to indicate the corresponding information fields, and the first terminal equipment can determine whether to receive the paging PDSCH according to the fourth information and the above-mentioned second information , or determine whether to monitor the paging PDCCH.
  • the second information may include one or more information fields
  • the fourth information is used to indicate an information field corresponding to the first terminal device group from the information fields included in the second information, and An information field corresponding to the second terminal device group.
  • the information field corresponding to the first terminal equipment group is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups into which the first terminal equipment group is divided are paged, and the information corresponding to the second terminal equipment group The field is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups into which the second terminal equipment group is divided are paged.
  • the information field included in the second information may be semi-statically configured by the network device in advance, or pre-defined by a protocol.
  • the fourth information may be used to indicate information corresponding to the first terminal equipment group and the second terminal equipment group area.
  • the information field included in the second information has a total of 20 bits, and the fourth information may indicate that the information field corresponding to the first terminal equipment group is 10 bits, and the information field corresponding to the second terminal equipment group is also 10 bits;
  • the fourth information may indicate that the information field corresponding to the first terminal equipment group is 15 bits, and the information field corresponding to the second terminal equipment group is also 5 bits; or, the fourth information may indicate that the information field corresponding to the first terminal equipment group is also 5 bits;
  • the information field corresponding to the group is 20 bits, and the information field corresponding to the second terminal equipment group is also 0 bits; it is not limited.
  • the information field corresponding to a terminal equipment group has 0 bits, it means that the second information does not include the information field corresponding to the terminal equipment group.
  • the first information indicates that the terminal equipment group is paged
  • the second information The information is not used for grouping indication of the terminal equipment group, that is, it is not used for indicating whether at least two subgroups into which the terminal equipment group is divided are paged.
  • the network device can send the fourth information used to indicate the information field corresponding to the terminal equipment group, and through the fourth information dynamically indicating the information field corresponding to the terminal equipment group, the paged terminal equipment can be flexibly determined
  • the number of groups of groups can reduce the paging false alarm probability of the terminal equipment, and further, can reduce the waste of power consumption of the terminal equipment.
  • the second information includes a first information field and a second information field. If the first information indicates that both the first terminal equipment group and the second terminal equipment group are paged,
  • the fourth information indicates that the first information field corresponds to the first terminal device group, and the second information field corresponds to the second terminal corresponding to a device group, the first information field is used to indicate whether the M1 subgroups included in the first terminal device group are paged, and the second information field is used to indicate the N1 subgroups included in the second terminal device group whether the group is paged; or,
  • the fourth information indicates that the first information field and the second information field correspond to the first terminal device group, and the first information field and the second information field is used to indicate whether M2 subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group are paged, and the M2 is greater than the M1.
  • the information fields included in the fourth information in this embodiment of the present application may include a first state and a second state, and in different states, information fields corresponding to the first terminal device group and the second terminal device group respectively Different, and further, the information field included in the second information is used to indicate that the number of subgroups included in the terminal device group is different.
  • the present application still takes the example that the first terminal equipment group and the second terminal equipment group are the RedCap UE group and the normal UE group respectively. It is assumed that the first terminal equipment group is the RedCap UE group and the second terminal equipment group is the normal UE group.
  • the fourth information indicates that the first information field corresponds to a RedCap UE group, and the first information field corresponds to a RedCap UE group.
  • An information field is used to indicate whether the M1 subgroups included in the RedCap UE group are paged, the second information field corresponds to the normal UE group, and the second information field is used to indicate whether the N1 subgroups included in the normal UE group are paged paging.
  • the first information field uses In order to indicate whether the 10 subgroups included in the RedCap UE group are paged, the second information field is used to indicate whether the 10 subgroups included in the normal UE group are paged.
  • the fourth information indicates that the first information field and the second information field are related to the RedCap Corresponding to the UE group, the first information field and the second information field are used to indicate whether the M2 subgroups included in the RedCap UE group are paged.
  • the first information field and the second information field may indicate whether the M2 subgroup included in the RedCap UE group is paged.
  • the number of subgroups that can be included in the RedCap UE group is greater than the number of subgroups included in the RedCap UE group only indicated by the first information field.
  • the number of subgroups included in the RedCap UE group indicated by the first information field is 10
  • the number of subgroups that the RedCap UE group indicated by the first information field and the second information field can include is 20, therefore, the first information field and the second information field are used to indicate whether the 20 subgroups included in the RedCap UE group are paged.
  • the number of bits of the information field included in the fourth information may be semi-statically configured by the network device, or pre-defined by the protocol; the first state and the second state may be pre-defined by the protocol, or semi-statically configured by the network device. .
  • first state and/or the second state may include one state value, or multiple state values, which are not limited.
  • the information field included in the fourth information has 1 bit, and the bit is set to “1" to indicate the first state, and the bit is set to "0" to indicate the second state.
  • the information field included in the fourth information has 2 bits, these 2 bits are set to “00” to indicate the first state, and set to "01” to indicate the second state; or, these two bits are set to "00” ” represents the first state, and set to “01” or “10” or “11” to represent the second state.
  • the fourth information when the information field included in the fourth information is in the second state, the fourth information indicates that the first information field and the second information field correspond to the first terminal device group, and the first information field and the first information field correspond to the first terminal device group.
  • the second information field is used to indicate whether the M2 subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group are paged.
  • the second information includes a first information field and a second information field. If the first information indicates that both the first terminal equipment group and the second terminal equipment group are paged,
  • the fourth information indicates that the first information field corresponds to the first terminal device group, and the second information field corresponds to the second terminal Device group correspondence
  • the first information field is used to indicate whether the M1 subgroups included in the first terminal device group are paged
  • the second information is used to indicate the N1 subgroups included in the second terminal device group. is paged; or,
  • the fourth information indicates that the first information field and the second information field correspond to the first terminal device group, and the first information field and the second information field is used to indicate whether the M2 subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group are paged, and the M2 is greater than the M1; or,
  • the fourth information indicates that the first information field and the second information field correspond to the second terminal device group, and the first information field and the second information field is used to indicate whether N2 subgroups included in the second terminal equipment group are paged, and the N2 is greater than the N1.
  • the information field included in the fourth information in this embodiment of the present application may include a third state, a fourth state, or a fifth state.
  • the corresponding information fields are different, and further, the information fields included in the second information are used to indicate that the number of subgroups included in the terminal device group is different.
  • the first terminal equipment group and the second terminal equipment group are respectively a RedCap UE group and a normal UE group as an example. It is assumed that the first terminal equipment group is a RedCap UE group and the second terminal equipment group is a normal UE. Group.
  • the fourth information indicates that the first information field corresponds to a RedCap UE group, and the first information field corresponds to a RedCap UE group.
  • An information field is used to indicate whether the M1 subgroups into which the RedCap UE group is divided are paging, the second information field corresponds to the normal UE group, and the second information field is used to indicate the N1 subgroups into which the normal UE group is divided whether to be paged.
  • the state of the information field included in the fourth information is "00"
  • the RedCap UE group and the normal UE group are both divided into 10 subgroups
  • the first information The field is used to indicate whether the 10 subgroups into which the RedCap UE group is divided are paged
  • the second information field is used to indicate whether the 10 subgroups into which the normal UE group is divided are paged.
  • the fourth information indicates that the first information field and the second information field are related to the RedCap Corresponding to the UE group, the first information field and the second information field are used to indicate whether the M2 subgroups into which the RedCap UE group is divided are paged.
  • the first information field and the second information field may indicate whether the M2 subgroups into which the RedCap UE group is divided are paged.
  • the number of subgroups into which the RedCap UE group can be divided is greater than the number of subgroups into which the RedCap UE group is divided by only using the first information field to indicate.
  • the first information field indicates that the number of subgroups into which the RedCap UE group is divided is 10, then in this case, the RedCap UE group indicated by the first information field and the second information field can be divided into subgroups The number is 20, therefore, the first information field and the second information field are used to indicate whether the 20 subgroups into which the RedCap UE group is divided are paged.
  • the fourth information indicates that the first information field and the second information field are the same as normal.
  • the first information field and the second information field are used to indicate whether the N2 subgroups into which the normal UE group is divided are paged.
  • the first information field and the second information field may indicate whether the N2 subgroups included in the normal UE group are paged.
  • the number of subgroups that can be included in the normal UE group is greater than the number of subgroups included in the normal UE group only indicated by the second information field.
  • the number of subgroups included in the normal UE group indicated by the second information field is 10 then in this case, the number of subgroups that can be included in the normal UE group indicated by the first information field and the second information field is 20, therefore, the first information field and the second information field are used to indicate whether the 20 subgroups included in the normal UE group are paged.
  • the number of bits of the information field included in the fourth information may be semi-statically configured by the network device, or pre-defined by the protocol; the third state, the fourth state and the fifth state may be pre-defined by the protocol, or by the network device. Semi-static configuration.
  • any one of the third state, the fourth state, and the fifth state may include one state value, or multiple state values, which are not limited.
  • the information field included in the fourth information has 2 bits, and these two bits are set to "11" to indicate the third state, set to "10" to indicate the fourth state, and set to "01" to indicate the fifth state.
  • the state of these two bits being set to "00" is reserved or used to indicate other functions.
  • the fourth information when the information field included in the fourth information is the fourth state or the fifth state, the fourth information indicates that the first information field and the second information field correspond to the first terminal equipment group or the second terminal
  • the device groups correspond, and the first information field and the second information field are used to indicate whether the M2 subgroups included in the first terminal device group are paged or whether the N2 subgroups included in the second terminal device group are paged.
  • the fourth information dynamically indicating the information field corresponding to the terminal equipment group, the number of groups of the terminal equipment group to be paged can be flexibly increased, the paging false alarm probability of the terminal equipment can be reduced, and further, the function of the terminal equipment can be reduced. wasted waste.
  • the fourth information is used to indicate that the number of bits corresponding to the information field included in the second information is in the first terminal equipment The distribution ratio between the group and the second terminal device group.
  • the second information includes an information field, and the information field has N bits.
  • the fourth information is used to indicate a ratio
  • the coefficient is represented by a, and among the N bits, a*N bits correspond to the first terminal equipment group, and (N-a)*N bits correspond to the second terminal equipment group.
  • a*N bits correspond to the first terminal equipment group
  • (N-a)*N bits correspond to the second terminal equipment group.
  • consecutive a*N bits correspond to the first terminal equipment group
  • (N ⁇ a)*N bits correspond to the first terminal device group.
  • Two terminal equipment groups correspond.
  • the value range of a is pre-defined by the protocol or semi-statically pre-configured by the network device.
  • the value range of a is a decimal between 0 and 1, such as 2/3, 1/2, 1/4, 1/6, etc.
  • the value range of a includes 0 and/or 1.
  • N/a bits of the N bits correspond to the first terminal equipment group, and the other N-N/a bits correspond to the first terminal equipment group.
  • the second terminal equipment group corresponds.
  • N/a consecutive bits from the first bit on the left (or from the right) of the N bits correspond to the first terminal equipment group, and the other N-N/a bits correspond to the second terminal. corresponding to the device group.
  • the value range of a includes 1.
  • the bits corresponding to the first terminal equipment group in the information field included in the second information are used to indicate whether at least two subgroups into which the first terminal equipment group is divided are paged, and the bits corresponding to the second terminal equipment group are used for Indicates whether at least two subgroups into which the second terminal equipment group is divided are paged.
  • the fourth information in this embodiment of the present application may dynamically indicate a scale coefficient a, and under different scale coefficients, the number of bits corresponding to the first terminal equipment group and the second terminal equipment group are respectively different, and further, The numbers of subgroups into which the first terminal equipment group and the second terminal equipment group are divided are different.
  • the fourth information dynamically indicates the number of bits corresponding to the terminal equipment group in the information field included in the second information, so that the number of groups of the paged terminal equipment group can be flexibly increased, and the number of terminal equipment groups can be reduced.
  • the paging false alarm probability can further reduce the waste of power consumption of the terminal equipment.
  • the number of terminal equipment groups indicated by the above-mentioned first information is only an exemplary illustration, and may also be used to indicate more than 3 terminal equipment groups, for example, 4 or 5 terminal equipment groups, which are not limited.
  • the second information includes a first information field and a second information field, if the first information indicates that the first terminal equipment group is paged and the second terminal equipment group is not paged,
  • the first information field, the second information field and the information field included in the fourth information are used to indicate whether the M3 subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group are paged; or,
  • the first information field and the second information field are used to indicate whether M2 subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group are paged, and the M2 is smaller than the M3; or,
  • the first information field is used to indicate whether the M1 subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group are paged, and the M1 is smaller than the M2; or,
  • the fourth information is used to indicate any one of the following situations: the first information field and the second information field are used to indicate whether the M2 subgroups are paged; or, the first information field Used to indicate whether the M1 subgroups are paged.
  • the embodiment of the present application still takes the example that the first terminal equipment group and the second terminal equipment group are respectively a RedCap UE group and a normal UE group, assuming that the first terminal equipment group is a RedCap UE group, and the second terminal equipment group is normal UE group.
  • the information fields included in the second information that is, the first information field and the second information field
  • the information fields included in the fourth information use To indicate whether the M3 subgroups included in the RedCap UE group are paged.
  • the first information field, the second information field and the information field included in the fourth information may indicate whether the M3 subgroups included in the RedCap UE group are was paged.
  • the number of subgroups that the RedCap UE group can include is greater than the number of subgroups included in the RedCap UE group indicated by the first information field and the second information field or only the first information field.
  • the first information field and the second information field are used to indicate that the number of subgroups included in the RedCap UE group is 20. In this case, the first information field and the second information field and the information included in the fourth information are used.
  • the field indicates that the number of subgroups included in the RedCap UE group can be 22 (assuming that the information field included in the fourth information has 2 bits), therefore, the first information field, the second information field and the information field included in the fourth information field can be used To indicate whether the 22 subgroups included in the RedCap UE group are paged.
  • the information fields included in the second information are used to indicate the M2 included in the RedCap UE group Whether the subgroup is paged.
  • the first information field and the second information field may indicate whether the M2 subgroups included in the RedCap UE group are paged.
  • the number of subgroups that the RedCap UE group can include is greater than the number of subgroups included in the RedCap UE group indicated by the first information field.
  • the number of subgroups included in the RedCap UE group indicated by the first information field is 10
  • the number of subgroups that the RedCap UE group indicated by the first information field and the second information field can include is 20, therefore, the first information field and the second information field are used to indicate whether the 20 subgroups included in the RedCap UE group are paged.
  • the information field included in the fourth information can be set to a specific state or reserved or used to indicate other functions, which is not limited.
  • the first information field included in the second information is used to indicate whether the M1 subgroups included in the RedCap UE group are paged.
  • the first information field may indicate whether the M1 subgroups included in the RedCap UE group are paged.
  • the RedCap UE group may include 10 subgroups, and the first information field is used to indicate whether the 10 subgroups included in the RedCap UE group are paged.
  • the second information field and/or the information field included in the fourth information may be set to a specific state or reserved or used to indicate other functions, which is not limited.
  • the fourth information is used to indicate any of the following:
  • the first information field and the second information field are used to indicate whether the M2 subgroups are paged; or,
  • the first information field is used to indicate whether the M1 subgroups are paged.
  • the fourth information may be used to indicate whether the first information field and the second information field indicate whether the M2 subgroups included in the RedCap UE group are paged. call.
  • the RedCap UE group may include 20 subgroups, and the fourth information may be used to indicate whether the first information field and the second information field indicate whether the 20 subgroups included in the RedCap UE group are paged.
  • the fourth information may be used to indicate whether the first information field indicates whether the M1 subgroups included in the RedCap UE group are paged.
  • the RedCap UE group may include 10 subgroups, and the fourth information may be used to indicate whether the first information field indicates whether the 10 subgroups included in the RedCap UE group are paged.
  • the first information field, the second information field and the information field included in the fourth information can dynamically indicate that the Whether the at least two subgroups into which the paging first terminal equipment group is divided are paging, can flexibly increase the number of groups of the paging terminal equipment group, can reduce the paging false alarm probability of the terminal equipment, and further, can Reduce the waste of power consumption of terminal equipment.
  • the second information includes an information field, if the first information indicates that the first terminal equipment group is paged and the second terminal equipment group is not paged,
  • the information field included in the second information and the information field included in the fourth information are used to indicate whether the M3 subgroups into which the first terminal equipment group is divided are paged; or,
  • the information field included in the second information is used to indicate whether the M2 subgroups into which the first terminal equipment group is divided are paged, and the M2 is smaller than the M3.
  • the embodiment of the present application still takes the example that the first terminal equipment group and the second terminal equipment group are respectively a RedCap UE group and a normal UE group, assuming that the first terminal equipment group is a RedCap UE group, and the second terminal equipment group is normal UE group.
  • the information field included in the second information and the information field included in the fourth information are used to indicate whether the M3 subgroups into which the RedCap UE group is divided are paged.
  • the information field included in the second information and the information field included in the fourth information may indicate whether the M3 subgroups into which the RedCap UE group is divided are paging.
  • the number of subgroups into which the RedCap UE group can be divided is greater than the above-mentioned partial bits (ie a*N or N/a bits) in the information field included with the second information to indicate that the RedCap UE group is divided the number of subgroups.
  • the above-mentioned partial bits in the information field included in the second information indicate that the number of subgroups into which the RedCap UE group is divided is 15 (for example, assuming that a*N or N/a is equal to 15), then in this case, Using the information field included in the second information and the information field included in the fourth information to indicate that the number of subgroups into which the RedCap UE group is divided may be 22 (for example, it is assumed that the information field included in the fourth information has 2 bits). Therefore, the first The information field included in the second information and the information field included in the fourth information may be used to indicate whether the 22 subgroups into which the RedCap UE group is divided are paged.
  • the information field included in the second information is used to indicate whether the M2 subgroups into which the RedCap UE group is divided are paged.
  • the information field included in the second information may indicate whether the M2 subgroups into which the RedCap UE group is divided are paged.
  • the number of subgroups into which the RedCap UE group can be divided is greater than the above-mentioned partial bits (ie a*N or N/a bits) in the information field included with the second information to indicate that the RedCap UE group is divided the number of subgroups.
  • the above-mentioned partial bits in the information field included in the second information indicate that the number of subgroups into which the RedCap UE group is divided is 15 (for example, assuming that a*N or N/a is equal to 15), then in this case, The number of subgroups into which the RedCap UE group indicated by the information field included in the second information can be divided is 20. Therefore, the information field included in the second information is used to indicate whether the 20 subgroups into which the RedCap UE group is divided are paged.
  • the information field included in the fourth information can be set to a specific state or reserved or used to indicate other functions, which is not limited.
  • the information field included in the second information and the information field included in the fourth information can dynamically indicate the paged Whether the at least two subgroups into which the first terminal equipment group is divided are paged, can flexibly increase the number of groups of the terminal equipment group to be paged, can reduce the paging false alarm probability of the terminal equipment, further, can reduce the number of terminal equipment Waste of power consumption of equipment.
  • the second information includes one information field or two information fields, such as a first information field and a second information field, if the first information indicates that neither the first terminal device group nor the second terminal device group being paged,
  • the second information includes one information field or two information fields and at least one of the information fields included in the fourth information is reserved or set to a specific state or used to indicate other functions.
  • the embodiment of the present application still takes the example that the first terminal equipment group and the second terminal equipment group are respectively a RedCap UE group and a normal UE group, assuming that the first terminal equipment group is a RedCap UE group, and the second terminal equipment group is normal UE group.
  • the second information includes the first information field and the second information field.
  • the first information indicates that neither the RedCap UE group nor the normal UE group is paged
  • at least one of the first information field, the second information field and the information field included in the fourth information is reserved or set to a specific state or used to indicate other functions.
  • the first information field and the second information field are reserved, and the information field included in the fourth information is set to a specific state or used to indicate other functions; or, the information fields included in the first information field and the fourth information are reserved, the second information field is set to a specific state or used to indicate other functions; or, the information fields included in the second information field and the fourth information are reserved, and the first information field is set to a specific state or used to indicate other functions ; without restriction.
  • the specific state may be predefined by a protocol or semi-statically configured by a network device.
  • the fourth information may also be used to indicate information fields corresponding to the first terminal equipment group, the second terminal equipment group, and the third terminal equipment group.
  • the first information field, the second information field and the third information field included in the second information are respectively Used to indicate whether the subgroups into which the first terminal equipment group, the second terminal equipment group, and the third terminal equipment group are divided are paged, wherein the second information includes the subgroup used to indicate that the first terminal equipment group is divided.
  • the corresponding information fields, the information fields corresponding to the subgroups used to indicate that the second terminal equipment group is divided, and the information fields corresponding to the subgroups used to indicate that the third terminal equipment group is divided can use the fourth information dynamic instruct.
  • the first information field and the third information field included in the second information can be used to indicate the first information field and the third information field.
  • the second information field can be used to indicate whether the subgroup into which the second terminal equipment group is divided is paging, wherein the second information includes is used to indicate the first terminal
  • the information field corresponding to the subgroup into which the device group is divided and the information field corresponding to the subgroup used to indicate that the second terminal device group is divided may be dynamically indicated by using the fourth information.
  • the second information includes the first information field, the second information field and the third information field It can be used to indicate whether the subgroup to which the first terminal equipment group is divided is paged, wherein the information field corresponding to the subgroup to which the first terminal equipment group is divided and included in the second information can be dynamically updated by using the fourth information. instruct.
  • the number of terminal equipment groups indicated by the above-mentioned first information is only an exemplary illustration, and can also be used to indicate terminal equipment groups with more than 3 terminal equipment groups, for example, can be used to indicate 4 or 5 terminal equipment groups, etc., No restrictions.
  • the third information is carried in the first DCI, or in the first media access control control element (media access control control element, MAC CE), or in RRC signaling;
  • the fourth information is carried in the second DCI or in the second MAC CE.
  • the third information in this embodiment of the present application may be carried in RRC signaling, and semi-statically configured by the network device.
  • the third information may be carried in the first DCI or the first MAC CE and dynamically indicated by the network device.
  • the third information when the third information is carried in the first DCI, it may be located in the same DCI as the first information and/or the second information, or in a different DCI.
  • the fourth information when the fourth information is carried in the second DCI, it may be located in the same DCI as the first information and/or the second information, or a different DCI, which is not limited.
  • the fourth information takes effect immediately, that is, acts on the second information in the same second DCI, and starts from the second information in the second DCI.
  • the information fields included in the second information indicate an information field corresponding to the first terminal equipment group and an information field corresponding to the second terminal equipment group.
  • the fourth information takes effect on the second information in the second DCI after that, and the fourth information takes effect until the terminal device receives it.
  • the terminal device determines, according to the newly received fourth information, the information domain corresponding to the first terminal device group among the information domains included in the second information, and the information domain corresponding to the second terminal device group information domain.
  • the terminal device determines, according to the current fourth information, the information domain corresponding to the first terminal device group among the information domains included in the second information, and the information domain corresponding to the second terminal device group. information field.
  • the terminal device performs RRM measurement in addition to monitoring the paging PDCCH.
  • the terminal device generally wakes up from the sleep state to monitor the paging PDCCH and RRM measurement.
  • the terminal device since the terminal device has been sleeping for a long time, the terminal device generally performs automatic gain control (automatic gain control, AGC) adjustment and time-frequency synchronization.
  • AGC automatic gain control
  • the terminal device may also perform beam selection. Therefore, the power consumption of the terminal equipment in the RRC_idle state or the RRC_inactive state mainly includes the following items:
  • the terminal device After the terminal device wakes up from a long-term deep sleep state, it needs to perform AGC adjustment and time-frequency synchronization.
  • the terminal equipment can realize AGC adjustment and time-frequency synchronization by receiving the reference signal.
  • the terminal device In NR, in the RRC idle state or the RRCinactive state, the terminal device can perform AGC adjustment and time-frequency synchronization based on a synchronization signal block (SSB) signal.
  • SSB synchronization signal block
  • the period of the SSB signal in NR is relatively large, generally 20ms. The minimum can be 5ms and the maximum can be 160ms.
  • a terminal device may require 2 to 3 SSBs to complete AGC adjustment and time-frequency synchronization at low signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR), while only 1 SSB may be required at high SINR AGC adjustment and time-frequency synchronization can be realized, or under high SINR, the time-frequency error and AGC offset of the terminal equipment are small. Within the tolerance range, the SSB can no longer be received to perform AGC adjustment and time-frequency synchronization. After waking up, you can directly receive data at the PO to monitor whether there is a paging DCI.
  • SINR signal to interference plus noise ratio
  • a high SINR indicates that the received power of the useful signal is relatively high relative to the noise power and interference power, which means that the signal is better.
  • a low SINR indicates that the received power of the wanted signal is low relative to the noise power and interference power, which means that the signal is poor.
  • the terminal device Since the terminal device generally needs 1 to 3 SSBs to complete the AGC adjustment and time-frequency synchronization, the terminal device needs to wake up a long time before the PO, and maintain a light sleep or deep sleep between the SSB and the SSB and between the SSB and the PO sleep. It can be seen that the terminal device needs to wake up multiple times (which involves multiple state switching) and maintain a wake-up/light sleep state for a long time, which will cause the terminal device to consume a lot of power consumption.
  • the purpose of monitoring the paging PDCCH is to receive short messages and paging messages, and the paging messages are carried by the paging PDSCH.
  • the paging PDCCH carries the paging DCI, and the paging DCI may schedule the paging PDSCH. Short messages are in the paging DCI.
  • the paging DCI will indicate that there is a paging message, that is, the paging DCI will schedule a paging PDSCH, otherwise, the paging PDCCH has no PDSCH scheduling information.
  • the information of the terminal device such as the ID of the terminal device, will be carried in the paging PDSCH.
  • the terminal device decodes the PDSCH, if the ID carried by the paging PDSCH matches its own ID, it indicates that it has been paged; otherwise, the terminal device is not actually paged, and other terminal devices monitoring the PO are paging.
  • the purpose of the mobility RRM measurement is to enable the terminal equipment in the RRC_idle state and the RRC_inactive state to perform cell selection/reselection, and to enable the terminal equipment in the RRC_connected state to perform cell handover.
  • reference signals used for RRM measurement mainly include two types: SSB signal and channel state information-reference signal (CSI-RS) signal.
  • the SSB signal is a cell-level signal, so the terminal equipment can use it in the RRC idle state/inactive state/connected state.
  • the CSI-RS signal can only be used by the terminal equipment in the RRC connection state.
  • the base station can configure certain CSI-RS resources for mobility RRM measurement through RRC signaling.
  • the specific signal used for RRM measurement can be configured by RRC signaling.
  • the RRM measurement can only be performed based on the SSB signal.
  • the terminal device When the terminal device performs RRM measurement based on the SSB signal, if the network device configures the SSB measurement time configuration (measurement time configuration, SMTC) for the terminal device, the terminal device can perform RRM measurement within the SMTC window time; if the terminal device is not configured SMTC, the terminal device assumes that the period of the SSB can be 5ms, and the terminal device can perform RRM measurement within the 5ms.
  • SMTC measurement time configuration
  • a synchronization signal burst set (SS burst set) can contain multiple SSBs, that is, the SSBs are sent in the form of beam scanning, and the paging PDCCH is also in the form of beam-sweeping.
  • Sending, that is, one PO consists of multiple PDCCH monitoring occasions, and the kth PDCCH monitoring occasion corresponds to the kth SSB actually sent.
  • the terminal device may consider that the paging DCI is repeatedly sent in multiple beams, and the specific selection of which beam to receive the paging DCI may be implemented by the terminal device.
  • a terminal device will select a beam based on a reference signal (such as SSB) before monitoring the paging PDCCH, and then monitor the paging PDCCH on the beam corresponding to the selected beam. If the terminal device does not select an appropriate beam in advance, the terminal device will monitor the paging PDCCH on multiple PDCCH monitoring occasions (ie, multiple beams) in order to ensure that the paging DCI is not missed. It can be seen that beam selection and/or monitoring and paging PDCCHs at multiple PDCCH monitoring occasions will consume relatively large power consumption of the terminal device.
  • the present application can carry the above-mentioned first information and second information through different channels/signals, as detailed below.
  • the paging advance indicator channel/signal carries the first information
  • the paging PDCCH carries the second information
  • the paging advance indicator channel/signal is used in the paging in the time domain.
  • the paging advance indicator channel/signal and the paging PDCCH are located in the same time slot (slot) or subframe (subframe); or, the paging advance indicator channel/signal carries the first information and part of the information included in the second information
  • the paging PDCCH carries information other than the part of the information in the second information.
  • the paging early indication channel/signal in the embodiment of the present application is used to carry a paging early indication (paging early indication, PEI).
  • the paging advance indication channel/signal may also be called a wake-up signal (wake-up signal, WUS), which is not limited.
  • FIG. 6 shows a schematic diagram of a terminal device monitoring a paging PDCCH at a paging occasion according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device before monitoring the paging PDCCH, the terminal device can wake up from the deep sleep state to receive SSB, perform AGC adjustment and/or time-frequency synchronization, if the time between SSB and PO If the interval is short, the UE may switch to a light sleep state within this interval, and then monitor the paging PDCCH at the paging occasion.
  • the power consumed when the terminal device is in the deep sleep state is smaller than the power consumed when the terminal device is in the light sleep state.
  • the terminal device can receive PEI before monitoring the PO. If the PEI indicates that the terminal device is not paged, the terminal device can directly enter the deep sleep state to save energy. Power consumption.
  • the paging advance indicator channel/signal can be used to carry PEI, and the paging PDCCH can carry paging DCI. Therefore, in this embodiment of the present application, the PEI can include the first information, and the paging DCI can include the second information.
  • the PEI is located before the paging PDCCH in the time domain, and after receiving the PEI, the first terminal device can determine whether the first terminal device group it belongs to is paged, and thus can determine whether to monitor the paging PDCCH.
  • the first terminal device may determine not to monitor the paging PDCCH, thereby returning to the deep sleep state. to save power consumption.
  • the first terminal equipment determines to monitor the paging PDCCH, the paging PDCCH will carry the paging DCI, and the first terminal equipment determines to monitor the paging PDCCH.
  • the device finds the second information in the received paging DCI, so as to determine whether the subgroup to which it belongs is paged according to the indication of the second information. If the second information indicates that the subgroup in which the first terminal device is located is paged, the first terminal device receives the paging PDSCH scheduled by the paging DCI, otherwise, the first terminal device may not receive the paging PDSCH scheduled by the paging DCI, thereby entering the sleep state.
  • the second information is not used for the grouping indication of the first terminal equipment group, then the first terminal equipment can only determine the paging of the first terminal equipment group to which it belongs, The paging PDSCH scheduled by the paging DCI is then received.
  • the terminal device periodically monitors the paging PDCCH with the paging DRX cycle. After the PEI is introduced, the terminal device also periodically monitors the paging advance indicator channel/signal.
  • the cycle of the paging advance indicator channel/signal can be It is an integer multiple of the paging DRX cycle, for example, equal to one paging DRX cycle.
  • a paging advance indicator channel/signal monitored by the terminal device will have a second paging advance indicator channel/signal after a period of one paging advance indicator channel/signal.
  • the PO of the terminal device exists between channels/signals in advance, and the terminal device monitors the paging PDCCH on its own PO.
  • the paging advance indicator channel/signal precedes the paging PDCCH in the time domain, wherein the paging advance indicator channel/signal represents the time from the paging advance indicator channel/signal to the paging advance indicator channel
  • the next paging advance indication channel after the /signal/the paging PDCCH before the signal it should be understood that the paging PDCCH is the paging PDCCH to be monitored by the terminal device.
  • the first terminal equipment determines that the monitored paging PDCCH is located after the PEI, and is located in the next lower level after the PEI. Before a paging advance indicator channel/signal, and the paging PDCCH is the PDCCH to be monitored by the first terminal device in its own PO.
  • the paging advance indication channel/signal and the paging PDCCH are located in the same time slot or subframe.
  • the monitoring timings of the paging advance indicator channel/signal and the paging PDCCH are the same, that is, the terminal device monitors the paging advance indicator channel/signal at the PO that monitors the paging PDCCH.
  • the first information is carried by the paging advance indication channel/signal (such as PEI), and the second information is carried by paging the PDCCH, so that the first terminal device can determine itself in advance according to the indication of the first information in the PEI Whether the terminal equipment group it belongs to is paged to determine whether to monitor the paging PDCCH.
  • the PEI only includes the first information, which can save the signaling overhead of the PEI, help reduce the block error rate (block error rate, BLER) of the PEI, and improve the reliability of the PEI.
  • the PEI may include the first information, in addition, the PEI further includes partial information of the second information, and the paging DCI includes information other than the partial information in the second information.
  • the second information includes a first information field and a second information field
  • the first information field has Q1 bits
  • the second information field has Q2 bits
  • the PEI includes the first information and all the Q1 bits of the first information field
  • the paging DCI includes Q2 bits of the second information field.
  • the first information field is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups into which the first terminal equipment group is divided are paged. Meanwhile, if the first information indicates that the second terminal equipment group is also paged, the second information field is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups into which the second terminal equipment group is divided are paged.
  • the first terminal device can determine whether the subgroup in which it belongs is paged without receiving the paging DCI, and can determine in advance whether to monitor the paging PDCCH, which helps to save the power consumption of the first terminal device.
  • the first terminal equipment group may be a RedCap UE group
  • the second terminal equipment group may be a Normal UE group.
  • the first information field is used to indicate that the second terminal equipment group is divided. whether at least two subgroups are paged; or, the second information field is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups into which the second terminal equipment group is divided are paged; or, the first information field and the The second information field is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups into which the second terminal equipment group is divided are paged.
  • the embodiments of the present application are also applicable to multiple terminal device groups of two terminal device groups.
  • the first information may be used to indicate whether the first terminal equipment group, the second terminal equipment group, and the third terminal equipment group are paged
  • the second information may be used to indicate the subgroups included in the three terminal equipment groups whether to be paged.
  • the first information field is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups into which the first terminal equipment group is divided are paged, so The second information field is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups into which the second terminal equipment group is divided are paged.
  • the PEI includes the first information
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device can determine whether the subgroup to which they belong is paged without receiving the paging DCI, and can determine in advance whether to monitor the paging PDCCH. Helps save power consumption.
  • the paging advance indication channel/signal carries part of the first information and the second information, so that the terminal equipment corresponding to the partial information field can determine in advance whether the terminal equipment subgroup in which it belongs is paged or not. , to determine whether to monitor the paging PDCCH.
  • the terminal device determines that it has not been paged, it can return to the deep sleep state as soon as possible, thereby further saving the power consumption of the terminal device.
  • the PEI may include the first information and the second information.
  • the first terminal device determines whether to monitor the paging PDCCH according to the second information.
  • any terminal device can determine whether the terminal device group or terminal device sub-group to which it belongs is paged according to the first information and the second information in the received PEI. If it is determined that the terminal equipment group or the terminal equipment subgroup to which the user belongs is not paged, the monitoring of the paging PDCCH can be avoided, and the sleep state can be returned as soon as possible to save power consumption.
  • the paging DCI includes the first information and the second information.
  • the first terminal device determines whether to receive the paging PDSCH according to the second information.
  • the short message indicator field (short message indicator field) in the paging DCI corresponds to the first terminal equipment group, and is used to indicate whether the first terminal equipment group is paged, and among the reserved bits in the paging DCI 1 bit is used to indicate whether the second terminal equipment group is paged, that is, the first information includes the short message indication field and the 1 bit.
  • the short message indication field corresponds to the Normal UE group
  • the 1 bit corresponds to the RedCap UE group.
  • the short message indication field When the short message indication field is set to the state "01" or “11”, it means that the Normal UE group is paged, and when the short message indication field is set to "00" or “10", it means that the Normal UE group is not paged.
  • the 1 bit When the 1 bit is set to "1”, it indicates that the RedCap UE group is paged, and when the 1 bit is set to "0”, it indicates that the RedCap UE group is paged.
  • 2 or more bits other than the 1 bit in the reserved bits in the paging DCI are used to carry the second information.
  • the paging DCI is used to schedule the paging PDSCH. If the terminal device determines that the terminal device group or the terminal device subgroup to which it belongs is not paged, it can avoid receiving or parsing the PDSCH and return to the sleep state as soon as possible to save power consumption. If the terminal equipment determines that the terminal equipment group or the terminal equipment subgroup to which it belongs is paged, the terminal equipment needs to receive the paging PDSCH.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device monitor the same paging PDCCH at the same PO, and/or the first terminal device and the second terminal The device listens to the same PAI channel/signal.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device are of the same device type, and the first terminal device and the second terminal device share the same paging advance indication channel/signal resource, and share the same paging PDCCH resource. That is, the first terminal device and the second terminal device monitor the same paging advance indication channel/signal, and when the paging PDCCH needs to be monitored (for example, if the first information indicates that the terminal device group or subgroup in which the first terminal device is located is paging, and the terminal equipment group or subgroup in which the second terminal equipment is located is also paged), the first terminal equipment and the second terminal equipment will monitor the paging PDCCH at the same or different POs.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device are of different device types, and the first terminal device and the second terminal device share the same paging advance indication channel/signal resource, and share the same paging PDCCH resource. That is, the first terminal device and the second terminal device monitor the same paging advance indication channel/signal, and when the paging PDCCH needs to be monitored (for example, if the first information indicates that the terminal device group or subgroup in which the first terminal device is located is paging, and the terminal equipment group or subgroup in which the second terminal equipment is located is also paged), the first terminal equipment and the second terminal equipment will monitor and paging the PDCCH at the same PO.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device are of different device types, and the first terminal device and the second terminal device share the same paging advance indication channel/signal resource, but do not share the paging PDCCH resource. That is, the first terminal device and the second terminal device monitor the same paging advance indication channel/signal, and when the paging PDCCH needs to be monitored (for example, if the first information indicates that the terminal device group or subgroup in which the first terminal device is located is paging, and the terminal equipment group or subgroup in which the second terminal equipment is located is also paged), the first terminal equipment and the second terminal equipment will monitor and paging PDCCH at different POs.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device are of different device types, and the first terminal device and the second terminal device do not share the paging advance indication channel/signal resource, but share the same paging PDCCH resource.
  • the first terminal device monitors the paging advance indicator channel/signal and also monitors the paging PDCCH, and the second terminal device only monitors the paging PDCCH.
  • a terminal equipment group or subgroup if a terminal equipment group or subgroup is instructed to be paged, it indicates that there is at least one terminal equipment to be paged in the terminal equipment group or subgroup. If a terminal equipment group or subgroup is indicated not to be paged, then all terminal equipments in this terminal equipment group or subgroup are not paged.
  • one information or one information field indicates whether at least two subgroups are paged, or whether M subgroups are paged, including multiple implementations.
  • the specific implementation can be semi-statically configured by the network device or preset by the protocol. Definition, without limitation.
  • the number Q of bits included in the information field for indicating whether the M subgroups are paged is equal to the number M of the subgroups.
  • each bit may correspond to a subgroup, and is used to indicate whether the corresponding subgroup is paged.
  • the information field included in the second information has 4 bits, and the second information is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group are paged, and the second information can indicate whether the four subgroups are paged, Then the terminal devices included in the first terminal device group will be divided into 4 subgroups.
  • the first terminal equipment group includes 20 UEs, and in some division manners, the 20 UEs are divided into subgroups 1 to 4, and each subgroup includes 5 UEs.
  • the 20 UEs are only divided into subgroup 1 and subgroup 2, each subgroup includes 10 UEs, and subgroup 3 and subgroup 4 do not include any terminal equipment.
  • M subgroups are paged includes a total of 2 M to the power of M) cases, for example, only subgroup 1 in M subgroups is paged as 1 case, and subgroup 1 and subgroup 2 in M subgroups are paged , other subgroups are not paged as another case. However, some cases are not indicated separately. For example, for the Y cases, when any one of the Y cases occurs, it corresponds to the same state included by the Q bits. In this way, the M subgroups can be indicated by the Q bits smaller than M. whether to be paged. For example, the probability of occurrence of certain situations is low, for example, the probability of 2 subgroups being paged or more than 2 subgroups being paged in M subgroups is relatively low, so if such a situation occurs, no separate indication is required.
  • the meanings of the bit states included in the Q bits are shown in Table 2 below.
  • how different terminal devices are divided into multiple terminal device groups includes multiple implementations, and specific implementations can be semi-statically configured by network devices or predefined by protocols, which are not limited.
  • the terminal devices are divided into multiple terminal device groups.
  • the one or more characteristics may be pre-defined by a semi-static configuration of the network device or by a protocol.
  • UEs monitoring the same PO are divided into the same terminal equipment group.
  • RedCap UE and Normal UE monitor the same PO and are divided into the same terminal device group.
  • adjacent R POs are associated with a PEI indication, and the first information included in the PEI is used to indicate whether the terminal equipment monitoring the R POs is paged.
  • the R POs may be located in the same paging frame, or located in multiple paging frames.
  • terminal devices monitoring the same PO belong to the same terminal device group, and terminal devices monitoring different POs belong to different terminal device groups.
  • the first information is used to indicate whether the R terminal equipment groups are paged.
  • the second information is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups included in the terminal equipment group are paged.
  • the second information may be located in the PEI, or in the paging DCI monitored by the terminal equipment included in the terminal equipment group in its own PO.
  • the R is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2.
  • how a terminal device group is divided into at least two subgroups includes multiple implementations, and specific implementations can be semi-statically configured by network devices or predefined by protocols, which are not limited.
  • the network device configures the subgroup ID through non-access stratum (Non-Access Stratum, NAS) signaling or RRC signaling.
  • Non-Access Stratum NAS
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the network device configuration or protocol predefines the number M of subgroups included in a terminal device group, and then calculates the subgroup ID to which the terminal device belongs according to the ID of the terminal device and the number of subgroups.
  • the subgroup ID to which the terminal device belongs can be calculated according to the above formula (3).
  • FIG. 7 and FIG. 8 are schematic structural diagrams of possible communication apparatuses provided by embodiments of the present application. These communication apparatuses can implement the functions of the terminal equipment or the network equipment in the above method embodiments, and thus can also achieve the beneficial effects of the above method embodiments.
  • the communication device may be the terminal device 20 or the terminal device 30 or the terminal device 40 as shown in FIG. 1 , the network device 10 as shown in FIG. 1 , or the device applied to the terminal device Or a module (such as a chip) of an access network device.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication apparatus 900 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the apparatus 900 may include a transceiver module 910 and a processing module 920 .
  • the transceiver module 910 is configured to send first information, where the first information is used to indicate the first terminal device to which the first terminal device belongs. Whether the end device group is paged.
  • the transceiver module 910 is further configured to send second information. If the first information indicates that the first terminal equipment group is paged, the second information is used to indicate that the first terminal equipment group includes at least two Whether the subgroup is paged.
  • the transceiver module 910 is used to receive first information and second information, where the first information is used to indicate the first terminal Whether the first terminal device group to which the device belongs is paged. If the first information indicates that the first terminal equipment group is paged, and the second information is used to indicate whether at least two subgroups included in the first terminal equipment group are paged, the processing module 920 may further It is used to determine whether to receive the paging PDSCH, or to determine whether to monitor the paging PDCCH according to the second information.
  • transceiver module 910 and the processing module 920, reference may be made to the relevant descriptions in the foregoing method embodiments, which are not described herein again.
  • the communication apparatus 1000 includes a processor 1010 and an interface circuit 1020 .
  • the processor 1010 and the interface circuit 1020 are coupled to each other.
  • the interface circuit 1020 can be a transceiver or an input-output interface.
  • the communication apparatus 1000 may further include a memory 1030 for storing instructions executed by the processor 1010 or input data required by the processor 1010 to run the instructions or data generated after the processor 1010 runs the instructions.
  • the processor 1010 is used to execute the functions of the foregoing processing module 920
  • the interface circuit 1020 is used to execute the functions of the foregoing transceiver module 910 .
  • the terminal device chip When the above communication device is a chip applied to a terminal device, the terminal device chip implements the functions of the terminal device in the above method embodiments.
  • the terminal device chip receives information from other modules (such as a radio frequency module or an antenna) in the terminal device, and the information is sent by the network device to the terminal device; or, the terminal device chip sends information to other modules (such as a radio frequency module or an antenna) in the terminal device antenna) to send information, the information is sent by the terminal equipment to the network equipment.
  • modules such as a radio frequency module or an antenna
  • the network device chip When the above communication device is a chip applied to a network device, the network device chip implements the functions of the network device in the above method embodiments.
  • the network device chip receives information from other modules in the network device (such as a radio frequency module or an antenna), and the information is sent by the terminal device to the network device; or, the network device chip sends information to other modules in the network device (such as a radio frequency module or an antenna). antenna) to send information, the information is sent by the network equipment to the terminal equipment.
  • processor in the embodiments of the present application may be a central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), and may also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (digital signal processors, DSP), application-specific integrated circuits (application specific integrated circuit, ASIC), field programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components or any combination thereof.
  • CPU central processing unit
  • DSP digital signal processors
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • a general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor.
  • the method steps in the embodiments of the present application may be implemented in a hardware manner, or may be implemented in a manner in which a processor executes software instructions.
  • Software instructions can be composed of corresponding software modules, and software modules can be stored in random access memory (RAM), flash memory, read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM) , PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM), registers, hard disks, removable hard disks, CD-ROMs or known in the art in any other form of storage medium.
  • An exemplary storage medium is coupled to the processor, such that the processor can read information from, and write information to, the storage medium.
  • the storage medium can also be an integral part of the processor.
  • the processor and storage medium may reside in an ASIC.
  • the ASIC may be located in the access network equipment or in the terminal equipment.
  • the processor and the storage medium may also exist in the access network device or the terminal device as discrete components.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer programs or instructions.
  • the computer may be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer program or instructions may be stored in or transmitted over a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer-readable storage medium can be any available media that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server that integrates one or more available media.
  • the usable media may be magnetic media, such as floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes; optical media, such as digital versatile discs (DVD); and semiconductor media, such as solid state drives (solid state drives) disk, SSD).
  • “at least one” means one or more, and “plurality” means two or more.
  • “And/or”, which describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicates that there can be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can indicate: the existence of A alone, the existence of A and B at the same time, and the existence of B alone, where A, B can be singular or plural.
  • the character “/” generally indicates that the related objects are a kind of "or” relationship; in the formula of this application, the character "/” indicates that the related objects are a kind of "division" Relationship.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请提供了一种通信方法和装置，在本申请中，第一终端设备接收第一信息和第二信息，所述第一信息用于指示所述第一终端设备所属的第一终端设备组是否被寻呼；若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组被寻呼，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼，所述第一终端设备所属的子组是所述至少两个子组中的一个，所述第一终端设备根据所述第二信息确定是否接收寻呼物理下行共享信道PDSCH，或确定是否监听寻呼物理下行控制信道PDCCH。本申请提供的方案可以充分利用有限的比特信令资源进行分组指示，减少资源的浪费。

Description

通信方法和装置 技术领域
本申请涉及通信领域，尤其涉及一种通信方法和装置。
背景技术
处于无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)空闲态或RRC非激活态的终端设备主要执行以下过程：监听寻呼(paging)物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel，PDCCH)和无线资源管理(radio resource management，RRM)测量。
具体地，网络设备给终端设备配置一个寻呼不连续接收(discontinuous reception，DRX)周期，终端设备在一个寻呼DRX周期内只需要在一个寻呼时机(paging occasion，PO)(也可以称为寻呼时刻)监听寻呼PDCCH即可，在其他时候可以进入睡眠状态不去监听寻呼PDCCH。
如果监听同一个PO的终端设备中存在终端设备被寻呼，网络设备会在该PO发送寻呼下行控制信息(downlink control information，DCI)，寻呼DCI会调度一个寻呼物理下行共享信道(physical downlink shared channel，PDSCH)。寻呼PDSCH中会携带被寻呼的终端设备的标识(identity，ID)，如果终端设备在接收的PDSCH中匹配到自己的ID，则确认自己被寻呼；如果终端设备在寻呼PDSCH中未匹配到自己的ID，则确认自己没有被寻呼。这些未在寻呼PDSCH中匹配到自己ID的终端设备就是发生了寻呼虚警。可见，产生寻呼虚警的终端设备是没必要接收并译码PDSCH的，导致功耗浪费。
针对上述功耗浪费问题，通过对监听相同PO的终端设备进一步分组，也就是分子组(sub-grouping)。例如，在寻呼DCI中指示监听该PO的终端设备中的一个或多个子组是否被寻呼，这样，指示未被寻呼的终端设备子组中的终端设备就能直接进入睡眠状态，不去继续接收并译码寻呼PDSCH，从而可以节省功耗。
然而，当某一特征值对应的终端设备未被寻呼时，对应的比特也不能用给其他特征值对应的终端设备进行分组指示，导致比特资源的浪费；而且，对于某一特征值对应的终端设备，在不同时刻被寻呼的终端设备的数目在该特征值对应的总终端设备的数目所占的比例是不断变化的，因此，固定分配比特的方式在有些时刻的分组指示是不合适的。
发明内容
本申请提供一种通信方法和装置，可以充分利用有限的比特信令资源进行分组指示，减少资源的浪费。
第一方面，提供一种通信方法，包括：第一终端设备接收第一信息和第二信息，所述第一信息用于指示所述第一终端设备所属的第一终端设备组是否被寻呼；
若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组被寻呼，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼，所述第一终端设备所属的子组是所述至少两个 子组中的一个，所述第一终端设备根据所述第二信息确定是否接收寻呼物理下行共享信道PDSCH，或确定是否监听寻呼物理下行控制信道PDCCH。
本申请提供的方案，由于第二信息指示的内容与第一信息指示的内容有关，例如，在第一信息指示第一终端设备组被寻呼的情况下，则第二信息用于指示第一终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼，从而第一终端设备可以根据第二信息所指示的内容确定是否接收寻呼PDSCH，或确定是否监听寻呼PDCCH，而在第一信息指示第一终端设备组未被寻呼的情况下，第二信息可以不用于指示第一终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼，此时，第二信息可以被预留或者用于指示其他功能，因此，可以更充分的利用第二信息包括的信令资源，可以减少信令资源的浪费。
结合第一方面，在一些可能的设计中，若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组不被寻呼，则所述第二信息用于指示所述至少两个子组是否被寻呼且所述第二信息不生效，所述第一终端设备确定不接收所述PDSCH或确定不监听所述PDCCH。
本申请提供的方案，在第一信息指示第一终端设备组不被寻呼的情况下，则第二信息指示第一终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼且不生效，从而第一终端设备可以确定不接收寻呼PDSCH，或确定不监听寻呼PDCCH，因此，当第一信息和第二信息由不同的信道/信号承载时，第一终端设备可以只接收第一信息，不接收第二信息，可以减少功耗的浪费。或者，在第一信息指示第一终端设备组不被寻呼的情况下，第二信息包括的和第一终端设备组对应的信息域设置为特定状态，可以提高PDCCH传输的可靠性。或者，在第一信息指示第一终端设备组不被寻呼的情况下，第二信息包括的和第一终端设备组对应的信息域被预留，可以用于以后指示其他功能，从而可以避免比特信令资源浪费，提高信令资源利用率。
结合第一方面，在一些可能的设计中，所述第一信息还用于指示第二终端设备所属的第二终端设备组是否被寻呼。
结合第一方面，在一些可能的设计中，所述第二信息包括第一信息域和第二信息域，所述第一信息域为所述第一终端设备组对应的信息域，所述第二信息域为所述第二终端设备组对应的信息域；若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组被寻呼，所述第一信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M个子组是否被寻呼；若所述第一信息指示所述第二终端设备组被寻呼，所述第二信息域用于指示所述第二终端设备组被包括的N个子组是否被寻呼。
结合第一方面，在一些可能的设计中，所述第二信息包括第一信息域和第二信息域，所述第一信息域为所述第一终端设备组对应的信息域，所述第二信息域为所述第二终端设备组对应的信息域；
若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组均被寻呼，所述第一信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M1个子组是否被寻呼，所述第二信息域用于指示所述第二终端设备组包括的N1个子组是否被寻呼；或，
若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组被寻呼，且指示所述第二终端设备组未被寻呼，所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M2个子组是否被寻呼，且所述M2大于所述M1。
本申请提供的方案，在第一信息指示第一终端设备组被寻呼且第二终端设备组未被寻 呼时，第二信息包括的第一信息域和第二信息域用于指示第一终端设备组包括的M2个子组是否寻呼，由于M2大于M1，增加了被寻呼的终端设备组被划分的子组的数量，可以降低终端设备的寻呼虚警概率，进一步地，可以减少终端设备的功耗的浪费。
结合第一方面，在一些可能的设计中，所述第一终端设备接收第三信息，所述第三信息用于指示所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组的分组指示优先级，所述分组指示优先级用于确定优先被第二信息分组指示的终端设备组；
所述第一终端设备根据所述第二信息确定是否接收寻呼PDSCH，或确定是否监听寻呼PDCCH，包括：
所述第一终端设备根据所述第二信息和所述第三信息确定是否接收所述PDSCH，或确定是否监听所述寻呼PDCCH。
本申请提供的方案，可以通过第三信息指示或协议预先定义第一终端设备组和第二终端设备组的分组指示优先级，从而使得分组指示优先级高的终端设备组优先被分组指示，进而优先降低分组指示优先级高的终端设备的寻呼虚警概率。特别是对于功耗更为敏感的终端设备组，可以在有限信令资源和终端设备节能效果之间取得较好折中，从而可以提高信令资源的使用效率。
结合第一方面，在一些可能的设计中，所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组的分组指示优先级是由协议预先定义的。
结合第一方面，在一些可能的设计中，若所述第一终端设备组的分组指示优先级高于所述第二终端设备组，
若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组被寻呼，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼；或，
若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组未被寻呼，且指示所述第二终端设备组被寻呼，所述第二信息用于指示所述第二终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。
本申请提供的方案，若第一终端设备组的分组指示优先级高于第二终端设备，在第一终端设备组被寻呼时，第二信息指示第一终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼；在第一终端设备未被寻呼时，若第二终端设备组被寻呼，第二信息指示第二终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。从而使得第一终端设备组可以优先被分组指示，特别是对于功耗更为敏感的终端设备组，可以在有限信令资源和终端设备节能效果之间取得较好折中，从而可以提高信令资源的使用效率。
结合第一方面，在一些可能的设计中，所述第一信息包括的第P个字段对应第一终端设备组，第Q个字段对应第二终端设备组，所述P和Q为正整数，所述P小于Q，
若所述第P个字段为目标状态，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼；
若所述第P个字段为非目标状态，所述第Q个字段为目标状态，所述第二信息用于指示所述第二终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。
本申请提供的方案，若第P个字段为目标状态，第二信息用于指示第一终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼；在第P个字段为非目标状态，若第Q个字段为目标状态，第二信息用于指示第二终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。从而使得与第P个字段对应的第一终端设备组可以优先被分组指示，特别是对于功耗更为敏感的终端设 备组，可以在有限信令资源和终端设备节能效果之间取得较好折中，从而可以提高信令资源的使用效率。
结合第一方面，在一些可能的设计中，所述第一终端设备接收第四信息，若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组均被寻呼，所述第四信息用于指示与所述第一终端设备组对应的信息域，和与所述第二终端设备组对应的信息域；
所述第一终端设备根据所述第二信息确定是否接收寻呼PDSCH，或确定是否监听寻呼PDCCH，包括：
所述第一终端设备根据所述第二信息和所述第四信息确定是否接收所述寻呼PDSCH，或确定是否监听所述寻呼PDCCH。
本申请提供的方案，网络设备可以发送用于指示与终端设备组对应的信息域的第四信息，通过第四信息动态指示与终端设备组对应的信息域，可以灵活确定被寻呼的终端设备组的分组的数量，可以降低终端设备的寻呼虚警概率，进一步地，可以减少终端设备的功耗的浪费。
结合第一方面，在一些可能的设计中，所述第二信息包括第一信息域和第二信息域，若所述第一信息指示第一终端设备组和第二终端设备组均被寻呼，
若所述第四信息包括的信息域为第一状态，所述第四信息指示所述第一信息域与所述第一终端设备组对应，且所述第二信息域与所述第二终端设备组对应，所述第一信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M1个子组是否被寻呼，所述第二信息域用于指示所述第二终端设备组包括的N1个子组是否被寻呼；或，
若所述第四信息包括的信息域为第二状态，所述第四信息指示所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域与所述第一终端设备组对应，所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M2个子组是否被寻呼，所述M2大于所述M1。
本申请提供的方案，在第四信息包括的信息域为第二状态的情况下，第四信息指示第一信息域和第二信息域与第一终端设备组对应，且第一信息域和第二信息域用于指示第一终端设备组包括的M2个子组是否被寻呼。通过第四信息动态指示与终端设备组对应的信息域，可以灵活增加被寻呼的终端设备组的分组的数量，可以降低终端设备的寻呼虚警概率，进一步地，可以减少终端设备的功耗的浪费。
结合第一方面，在一些可能的设计中，所述第二信息包括第一信息域和第二信息域，若所述第一信息指示第一终端设备组和第二终端设备组均被寻呼，
若所述第四信息包括的信息域为第三状态，所述第四信息指示所述第一信息域与所述第一终端设备组对应，且所述第二信息域与所述第二终端设备组对应，所述第一信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M1个子组是否被寻呼，所述第二信息用于指示所述第二终端设备组包括的N1个子组是否被寻呼；或，
若所述第四信息包括的信息域为第四状态，所述第四信息指示所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域与所述第一终端设备组对应，所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M2个子组是否被寻呼，所述M2大于所述M1；或，
若所述第四信息包括的信息域为第五状态，所述第四信息指示所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域与所述第二终端设备组对应，所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示所述第二终端设备组包括的N2个子组是否被寻呼，所述N2大于所述N1。
本申请提供的方案，在第四信息包括的信息域为第四状态或第五状态的情况下，第四信息指示第一信息域和第二信息域与第一终端设备组对应或第二终端设备组对应，且第一信息域和第二信息域用于指示第一终端设备组包括的M2个子组是否被寻呼或用于指示第二终端设备组包括的N2个子组是否被寻呼。通过第四信息动态指示与终端设备组对应的信息域，可以灵活增加被寻呼的终端设备组的分组的数量，可以降低终端设备的寻呼虚警概率，进一步地，可以减少终端设备的功耗的浪费。
结合第一方面，在一些可能的设计中，所述第二信息包括第一信息域和第二信息域，若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组被寻呼，且所述第二终端设备组未被寻呼，
所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域以及所述第四信息包括的信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M3个子组是否被寻呼；或，
所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M2个子组是否被寻呼，所述M2小于所述M3；或，
所述第一信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M1个子组是否被寻呼，所述M1小于所述M2；或，
所述第四信息用于指示以下情况中的任一项：
所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示所述M2个子组是否被寻呼；或，
所述第一信息域用于指示所述M1个子组是否被寻呼。
本申请提供的方案，在第一终端设备组被寻呼且第二终端设备组未被寻呼的情况下，第一信息域和第二信息域以及第四信息包括的信息域可以动态指示被寻呼的第一终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼，可以灵活增加被寻呼的终端设备组的分组的数量，可以降低终端设备的寻呼虚警概率，进一步地，可以减少终端设备的功耗的浪费。
结合第一方面，在一些可能的设计中，所述第二信息包括第一信息域和第二信息域，若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组均未被寻呼，
所述第一信息域、所述第二信息域以及所述第四信息包括的信息域中的至少一个被预留或设置为特定状态或用于指示其他功能。
结合第一方面，在一些可能的设计中，所述第三信息承载于第一下行控制信息DCI中，或第一媒体接入控制控制单元MAC CE中，或无线电资源控制RRC信令中；
所述第四信息承载于第二DCI中，或第二MAC CE中。
结合第一方面，在一些可能的设计中，寻呼提前指示信道/信号承载所述第一信息，寻呼PDCCH承载所述第二信息，寻呼提前指示信道/信号在时域上在所述寻呼PDCCH之前，或所述寻呼提前指示信道/信号和所述寻呼PDCCH位于相同的时隙或相同的子帧；或，
所述寻呼提前指示信道/信号承载所述第一信息和所述第二信息包括的部分信息，所述寻呼PDCCH承载所述第二信息中除所述部分信息之外的信息。
本申请提供的方案，通过寻呼提前指示信道/信号(如PEI)承载第一信息，通过寻呼PDCCH承载第二信息，使得第一终端设备可以根据PEI中第一信息的指示，提前确定本身所在的终端设备组是否被寻呼，以确定是否监听寻呼PDCCH。当第一终端设备确定不监听寻呼PDCCH时，可以不必监听所述寻呼PDCCH，回到深度睡眠状态，从而可以进一步节省终端设备的功率消耗。另外，PEI只包括第一信息，可以节省PEI的信令开销，有助于降低PEI的块误码率，提高PEI的可靠性。或者，通过寻呼提前指示信道/信号承 载第一信息和第二信息的部分信息，可以使得所述部分信息域对应的终端设备提前确定本身所在的终端设备子组是否被寻呼，以确定是否监听寻呼PDCCH。这样，对于对功耗更加敏感的终端设备，可以在降低其寻呼虚警概率的同时，使其尽早得知自己是否被寻呼。当终端设备确定自己未被寻呼时，可以尽早回到深度睡眠状态，从而可以进一步节省终端设备的功率消耗。
结合第一方面，在一些可能的设计中，所述第一终端设备组包括的终端设备的特征相同，所述第二终端设备组包括的终端设备的特征相同，所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组包括的终端设备的特征不同，所述特征包括如下至少一种：
终端设备的类型、终端设备对功耗的敏感度、终端设备的被寻呼概率。
结合第一方面，在一些可能的设计中，所述第一终端设备和所述第二终端设备在相同的寻呼时机PO监听相同的寻呼PDCCH，和/或，
所述第一终端设备和所述第二终端设备监听相同的寻呼提前指示信道/信号。
第二方面，提供一种通信方法，包括：网络设备发送第一信息，所述第一信息用于指示第一终端设备所属的第一终端设备组是否被寻呼；
所述网络设备发送第二信息，若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组被寻呼，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。
本申请提供的方案，由于第二信息指示的内容与第一信息指示的内容有关，例如，在第一信息指示第一终端设备组被寻呼的情况下，则第二信息用于指示第一终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼，从而使得第一终端设备接收到第一信息和第二信息后，可以根据第二信息所指示的内容确定是否接收寻呼PDSCH，或确定是否监听寻呼PDCCH，而在第一信息指示第一终端设备组未被寻呼的情况下，第二信息可以不用于指示第一终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼，此时，第二信息可以被预留或者用于指示其他功能，因此，可以更充分的利用第二信息包括的信令资源，可以减少信令资源的浪费。
结合第二方面，在一些可能的设计中，若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组不被寻呼，所述第二信息用于指示所述至少两个子组是否被寻呼且所述第二信息不生效。
本申请提供的方案，在第一信息指示第一终端设备组不被寻呼的情况下，则第二信息指示第一终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼且不生效，从而使得第一终端设备在接收第一信息和第二信息后，可以确定不接收寻呼PDSCH，或确定不监听寻呼PDCCH，可以减少功耗的浪费。
结合第二方面，在一些可能的设计中，所述第一信息还用于指示第二终端设备所属的第二终端设备组是否被寻呼。
结合第二方面，在一些可能的设计中，所述第二信息包括第一信息域和第二信息域，所述第一信息域为所述第一终端设备组对应的信息域，所述第二信息域为所述第二终端设备组对应的信息域；若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组被寻呼，所述第一信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M个子组是否被寻呼；若所述第一信息指示所述第二终端设备组被寻呼，所述第二信息域用于指示所述第二终端设备组被包括的N个子组是否被寻呼。
结合第二方面，在一些可能的设计中，所述第二信息包括第一信息域和第二信息域，所述第一信息域为所述第一终端设备组对应的信息域，所述第二信息域为所述第二终端设 备组对应的信息域；
若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组均被寻呼，所述第一信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M1个子组是否被寻呼，所述第二信息域用于指示所述第二终端设备组包括的N1个子组是否被寻呼；或，
若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组被寻呼，且指示所述第二终端设备组未被寻呼，所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M2个子组是否被寻呼，且所述M2大于所述M1。
本申请提供的方案，在第一信息指示第一终端设备组被寻呼且第二终端设备组未被寻呼时，第二信息包括的第一信息域和第二信息域用于指示第一终端设备组包括的M2个子组是否寻呼，由于M2大于M1，增加了被寻呼的终端设备组被划分的子组的数量，可以降低终端设备的寻呼虚警概率，进一步地，可以减少终端设备的功耗的浪费。
结合第二方面，在一些可能的设计中，所述网络设备发送第三信息，所述第三信息用于指示所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组的分组指示优先级，所述分组指示优先级用于确定优先被第二信息分组指示的终端设备组。
本申请提供的方案，网络设备可以通过第三信息指示或协议预先定义第一终端设备组和第二终端设备组的分组指示优先级，从而使得分组指示优先级高的终端设备组优先被分组指示，进而优先降低分组指示优先级高的终端设备的寻呼虚警概率。特别是对于功耗更为敏感的终端设备组，可以在有限信令资源和终端设备节能效果之间取得较好折中，从而可以提高信令资源的使用效率。
结合第二方面，在一些可能的设计中，所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组的分组指示优先级是由协议预先定义的。
结合第二方面，在一些可能的设计中，若所述第一终端设备组的分组指示优先级高于所述第二终端设备组，
若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组被寻呼时，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼；
若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组未被寻呼，且指示所述第二终端设备组被寻呼时，所述第二信息用于指示所述第二终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。
本申请提供的方案，若第一终端设备组的分组指示优先级高于第二终端设备，在第一终端设备组被寻呼时，第二信息指示第一终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼；在第一终端设备未被寻呼时，若第二终端设备组被寻呼，第二信息指示第二终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。从而使得第一终端设备组可以优先被分组指示，特别是对于功耗更为敏感的终端设备组，可以在有限信令资源和终端设备节能效果之间取得较好折中，从而可以提高信令资源的使用效率。
结合第二方面，在一些可能的设计中，所述第一信息包括的第P个字段对应第一终端设备组，第Q个字段对应第二终端设备组，所述P和Q为正整数，所述P小于Q，
若所述第P个字段为目标状态，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼；
若所述第P个字段为非目标状态，所述第Q个字段为目标状态，所述第二信息用于指示所述第二终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。
本申请提供的方案，若第P个字段为目标状态，第二信息用于指示第一终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼；在第P个字段为非目标状态，若第Q个字段为目标状态，第二信息用于指示第二终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。从而使得与第P个字段对应的第一终端设备组可以优先被分组指示，特别是对于功耗更为敏感的终端设备组，可以在有限信令资源和终端设备节能效果之间取得较好折中，从而可以提高信令资源的使用效率。
结合第二方面，在一些可能的设计中，所述方法还包括：
所述网络设备发送第四信息，若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组均被寻呼，所述第四信息用于指示与所述第一终端设备组对应的信息域，和与所述第二终端设备组对应的信息域。
本申请提供的方案，网络设备可以发送用于指示与终端设备组对应的信息域的第四信息，通过第四信息动态指示与终端设备组对应的信息域，可以灵活确定被寻呼的终端设备组的分组的数量，可以降低终端设备的寻呼虚警概率，进一步地，可以减少终端设备的功耗的浪费。
结合第二方面，在一些可能的设计中，所述第二信息包括第一信息域和第二信息域，若第一信息指示第一终端设备组和第二终端设备组均被寻呼，
若所述第四信息包括的信息域为第一状态，所述第四信息指示所述第一信息域与所述第一终端设备组对应，且所述第二信息域与所述第二终端设备组对应，所述第一信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M1个子组是否被寻呼，所述第二信息域用于指示所述第二终端设备组包括的N1个子组是否被寻呼；或，
若所述第四信息包括的信息域为第二状态，所述第四信息指示所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域与所述第一终端设备组对应，所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M2个子组是否被寻呼，所述M2大于所述M1。
本申请提供的方案，在第四信息包括的信息域为第二状态的情况下，第四信息指示第一信息域和第二信息域与第一终端设备组对应，且第一信息域和第二信息域用于指示第一终端设备组包括的M2个子组是否被寻呼。网络设备通过第四信息动态指示与终端设备组对应的信息域，可以灵活增加被寻呼的终端设备组的分组的数量，可以降低终端设备的寻呼虚警概率，进一步地，可以减少终端设备的功耗的浪费。
结合第二方面，在一些可能的设计中，所述第二信息包括第一信息域和第二信息域，若第一信息指示第一终端设备组和第二终端设备组均被寻呼，
若所述第四信息包括的信息域为第三状态，所述第四信息指示所述第一信息域与所述第一终端设备组对应，且所述第二信息域与所述第二终端设备组对应，所述第一信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M1个子组是否被寻呼，所述第二信息用于指示所述第二终端设备组包括的N1个子组是否被寻呼；或，
若所述第四信息包括的信息域为第四状态，所述第四信息指示所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域与所述第一终端设备组对应，所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M2个子组是否被寻呼，所述M2大于所述M1；或，
若所述第四信息包括的信息域为第五状态，所述第四信息指示所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域与所述第二终端设备组对应，所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示所述 第二终端设备组包括的N2个子组是否被寻呼，所述N2大于所述N1。
本申请提供的方案，在第四信息包括的信息域为第四状态或第五状态的情况下，第四信息指示第一信息域和第二信息域与第一终端设备组对应或第二终端设备组对应，且第一信息域和第二信息域用于指示第一终端设备组包括的M2个子组是否被寻呼或用于指示第二终端设备组包括的N2个子组是否被寻呼。网络设备通过第四信息动态指示与终端设备组对应的信息域，可以灵活增加被寻呼的终端设备组的分组的数量，可以降低终端设备的寻呼虚警概率，进一步地，可以减少终端设备的功耗的浪费。
结合第二方面，在一些可能的设计中，所述第二信息包括第一信息域和第二信息域，若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组被寻呼，且所述第二终端设备组未被寻呼，
所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域以及所述第四信息包括的信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M3个子组是否被寻呼；或，
所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M2个子组是否被寻呼，所述M2小于所述M3；或，
所述第一信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M1个子组是否被寻呼，所述M1小于所述M2；或，
所述第四信息用于指示以下情况中的任一项：
所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示所述M2个子组是否被寻呼；或，
所述第一信息域用于指示所述M1个子组是否被寻呼。
本申请提供的方案，在第一终端设备组被寻呼且第二终端设备组未被寻呼的情况下，第一信息域和第二信息域以及第四信息包括的信息域可以动态指示被寻呼的第一终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼，可以灵活增加被寻呼的终端设备组的分组的数量，可以降低终端设备的寻呼虚警概率，进一步地，可以减少终端设备的功耗的浪费。
结合第二方面，在一些可能的设计中，所述第二信息包括第一信息域和第二信息域，若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组均未被寻呼，
所述第一信息域、所述第二信息域以及所述第四信息包括的信息域中的至少一个被预留或设置为特定状态或用于指示其他功能。
结合第二方面，在一些可能的设计中，所述第三信息承载于第一下行控制信息DCI中，或第一媒体接入控制控制单元MAC CE中，或无线电资源控制RRC信令中；
所述第四信息承载于第二DCI中，或第二MAC CE中。
结合第二方面，在一些可能的设计中，寻呼提前指示信道/信号承载所述第一信息，寻呼PDCCH承载所述第二信息，所述寻呼提前指示信道/信号在时域上在所述寻呼PDCCH之前，或所述寻呼提前指示信道/信号和所述寻呼PDCCH位于相同的时隙或相同的子帧；或，
所述寻呼提前指示信道/信号承载所述第一信息和所述第二信息包括的部分信息，所述寻呼PDCCH承载所述第二信息中除所述部分信息之外的信息。
本申请提供的方案，通过寻呼提前指示信道/信号(如PEI)承载第一信息，通过寻呼PDCCH承载第二信息，使得第一终端设备在接收到PEI后，可以根据PEI中第一信息的指示，提前确定本身所在的终端设备组是否被寻呼，以确定是否监听寻呼PDCCH。当第一终端设备确定不监听寻呼PDCCH时，可以不必监听所述寻呼PDCCH，回到深度睡眠 状态，从而可以进一步节省终端设备的功率消耗。另外，PEI只包括第一信息，可以节省PEI的信令开销，有助于降低PEI的块误码率，提高PEI的可靠性。或者，通过寻呼提前指示信道/信号承载第一信息和第二信息的部分信息，可以使得所述部分信息域对应的终端设备提前确定本身所在的终端设备子组是否被寻呼，以确定是否监听寻呼PDCCH。这样，对于对功耗更加敏感的终端设备，可以在降低其寻呼虚警概率的同时，使其尽早得知自己是否被寻呼。当终端设备确定自己未被寻呼时，可以尽早回到深度睡眠状态，从而可以进一步节省终端设备的功率消耗。
结合第二方面，在一些可能的设计中，所述第一终端设备组包括的终端设备的特征相同，所述第二终端设备组包括的终端设备的特征相同，所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组包括的终端设备的特征不同，所述特征包括如下至少一种：
终端设备的类型、终端设备对功耗的敏感度、终端设备的被寻呼概率。
结合第二方面，在一些可能的设计中，所述第一终端设备和所述第二终端设备在相同的寻呼时机PO监听相同的寻呼PDCCH，和/或，
所述第一终端设备和所述第二终端设备监听相同的寻呼提前指示信道/信号。
第三方面，提供一种通信装置，有益效果可以参见第一方面的描述，在此不再赘述。所述通信装置具有实现上述第一方面的方法实施例中行为的功能。所述功能可以通过硬件实现，也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。在一个可能的设计中，所述通信装置包括：收发模块，用于发送第一信息，所述第一信息用于指示第一终端设备所属的第一终端设备组是否被寻呼。所述收发模块还用于发送第二信息，若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组被寻呼，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。这些模块可以执行上述第一方面方法示例中的相应功能，具体参见方法示例中的详细描述，此处不做赘述。
第四方面，提供一种通信装置，有益效果可以参见第二方面的描述此处不再赘述。所述通信装置具有实现上述第二方面的方法实例中行为的功能。所述功能可以通过硬件实现，也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。在一个可能的设计中，所述通信装置包括：收发模块，用于接收第一信息和第二信息，所述第一信息用于指示所述第一终端设备所属的第一终端设备组是否被寻呼。所述通信装置还包括：处理模块，用于存储指令，若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组被寻呼，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼，用于根据所述第二信息确定是否接收寻呼PDSCH，或确定是否监听寻呼PDCCH。这些模块可以执行上述第二方面方法示例中的相应功能，具体参见方法示例中的详细描述，此处不做赘述。
第五方面，提供了一种通信装置，该通信装置可以为上述方法实施例中的终端设备，或者为设置在终端设备中的芯片。该通信装置包括通信接口以及处理器，可选的，还包括存储器。其中，该存储器用于存储计算机程序或指令，处理器与存储器、通信接口耦合，当处理器执行所述计算机程序或指令时，使通信装置执行上述方法实施例中由终端设备所执行的方法。
第六方面，提供了一种通信装置，该通信装置可以为上述方法实施例中的网络设备，或者为设置在网络设备中的芯片。该通信装置包括通信接口以及处理器，可选的，还包括 存储器。其中，该存储器用于存储计算机程序或指令，处理器与存储器、通信接口耦合，当处理器执行所述计算机程序或指令时，使通信装置执行上述方法实施例中由网络设备所执行的方法。
第七方面，提供了一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序代码，当所述计算机程序代码并运行时，使得上述各方面中由终端设备执行的方法被执行。
第八方面，提供了一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序代码，当所述计算机程序代码被运行时，使得上述各方面中由网络设备执行的方法被执行。
第九方面，本申请提供了一种芯片系统，该芯片系统包括处理器，用于实现上述各方面的方法中终端设备的功能。在一种可能的设计中，所述芯片系统还包括存储器，用于保存程序指令和/或数据。该芯片系统，可以由芯片构成，也可以包括芯片和其他分立器件。
第十方面，本申请提供了一种芯片系统，该芯片系统包括处理器，用于实现上述各方面的方法中网络设备的功能。在一种可能的设计中，所述芯片系统还包括存储器，用于保存程序指令和/或数据。该芯片系统，可以由芯片构成，也可以包括芯片和其他分立器件。
第十一方面，本申请提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序，当该计算机程序被运行时，实现上述各方面中由终端设备执行的方法。
第十二方面，本申请提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序，当该计算机程序被运行时，实现上述各方面中由网络设备执行的方法。
附图说明
图1为适用于本申请实施例的无线通信系统的示意图。
图2为终端设备在其寻呼时机监听寻呼PDCCH的示意图。
图3为本申请提供的对具有相同特征的终端设备分配的比特的示意图。
图4为本申请提供的在不同时刻，针对设备类型这一特征，被寻呼的终端设备的数目在具有某一特征值的总终端设备的数目所占的比例的示意图。
图5为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的流程示意图。
图6为本申请实施例提供的一种终端设备在寻呼时机监听寻呼PDCCH的示意图。
图7为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的示意性结构图。
图8为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信装置的示意性结构图。
具体实施方式
下面将结合附图，对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统，例如：长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)系统(包括LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex，FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex，TDD))、第五代(5th generation，5G)移动通信系统或新无线(new radio，NR)通信系统以及未来的移动通信系统等。
图1是适用于本申请实施例的无线通信系统100的示意图。如图1所示，该无线通信系统100可以包括一个或多个网络设备，例如，图1所示的网络设备10。该无线通信系统100还可以包括一个或多个终端设备，例如，图1所示的终端设备20、终端设备30、终端设备40等。
应理解，图1只是示意图，该通信系统中还可以包括其它网络设备，如还可以包括核心网设备和无线中继设备(也可以称为无线回传设备)，在图1中未画出。本申请的实施例对该移动通信系统中包括的网络设备和终端设备的数量不做限定。
在移动通信系统100中，本申请实施例中的终端设备20、终端设备30、终端设备40也可以称为终端、终端设备、移动台(mobile station，MS)、移动终端(mobile terminal，MT)等。本申请实施例中的终端设备可以是手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑(Pad)、带无线收发功能的电脑，还可以是应用于虚拟现实(virtual reality，VR)、增强现实(augmented reality，AR)、工业控制(industrial control)、无人驾驶(self driving)、远程医疗(remote medical)、智能电网(smart grid)、运输安全(transportation safety)、智慧城市(smart city)以及智慧家庭(smart home)等场景中的无线终端。本申请中将前述终端设备及可应用于前述终端设备的芯片统称为终端设备。应理解，本申请实施例对终端设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。
本申请实施例中的网络设备10可以是用于与终端设备通信的设备，该网络设备可以是基站、演进型基站(evolved node B，eNB)、家庭基站、无线保真(wireless fidelity，WIFI)系统中的接入点(access point，AP)、无线中继节点、无线回传节点、传输点(transmission point，TP)或者发送接收点(transmission and reception point，TRP)等，还可以为NR系统中的gNB，或者，还可以是构成基站的组件或一部分设备，如集中单元(central unit，CU)、分布式单元(distributed unit，DU)或基带单元(baseband unit，BBU)等。应理解，本申请的实施例中，对网络设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。在本申请中，网络设备可以是指网络设备本身，也可以是应用于网络设备中完成无线通信处理功能的芯片。
应理解，在本申请实施例中，终端设备或网络设备包括硬件层、运行在硬件层之上的操作系统层，以及运行在操作系统层上的应用层。该硬件层包括中央处理器(central processing unit，CPU)、内存管理单元(memory management unit，MMU)和内存(也称为主存)等硬件。该操作系统可以是任意一种或多种通过进程(process)实现业务处理的计算机操作系统，例如，Linux操作系统、Unix操作系统、Android操作系统、iOS操作系统或windows操作系统等。该应用层包含浏览器、通讯录、文字处理软件、即时通信软件等应用。并且，本申请实施例并未对本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体的具体结构特别限定，只要能够通过运行记录有本申请实施例的提供的方法的代码的程序，以根据本申请实施例提供的方法进行通信即可，例如，本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体可以是终端设备或网络设备，或者，是终端设备或网络设备中能够调用程序并执行程序的功能模块。
另外，本申请的各个方面或特征可以实现成方法、装置或使用标准编程和/或工程技术的制品。本申请中使用的术语“制品”涵盖可从任何计算机可读器件、载体或介质访问的计算机程序。例如，计算机可读存储介质可以包括，但不限于：磁存储器件(例如，硬盘、软盘或磁带等)，光盘(例如，压缩盘(compact disc，CD)、数字通用盘(digital versatile disc，DVD)等)，智能卡和闪存器件(例如，可擦写可编程只读存储器(erasable programmable read-only memory，EPROM)、卡、棒或钥匙驱动器等)。
另外，本文描述的各种存储介质可代表用于存储信息的一个或多个设备和/或其它机器可读存储介质。术语“机器可读存储介质”可包括但不限于，无线信道和能够存储、包含 和/或承载指令和/或数据的各种其它介质。
应理解，本申请实施例中的方式、情况、类别以及实施例的划分仅是为了描述的方便，不应构成特别的限定，各种方式、类别、情况以及实施例中的特征在不矛盾的情况下可以相结合。
还应理解，本申请实施例中的“第一”、“第二”以及“第三”仅为了区分，不应对本申请构成任何限定。例如，本申请实施例中的“第一信息”和“第二信息”，表示网络设备和终端设备之间传输的信息。
还应理解，在本申请的各种实施例中，各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定，而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。
还需要说明的是，本申请实施例中，“预先定义”等可以通过在设备(例如，包括终端设备和网络设备)中预先保存相应的代码、表格或其他可用于指示相关信息的方式来实现，本申请对于其具体的实现方式不做限定，例如本申请实施例中预设的规则、预设的常数等。
还需要说明的是，“和/或”，描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B这三种情况。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。下面将结合附图详细说明本申请提供的技术方案。
在以下实施例中，不失一般性，以基站作为网络设备，将以至少两个终端设备之间的侧行链路的通信过程、以及终端设备和基站之间的上行链路的通信过程为例，具体介绍本申请的通信方法。该终端设备可以是处于无线通信系统中与一个或多个网络设备具有无线连接关系的任意终端设备。可以理解的是，处于该无线通信系统中的任意一个终端设备均可以基于相同的技术方案实现无线通信。本申请对此不做限定。
如上述图1所示，终端设备可以处于RRC激活(active)态、RRC非激活(inactive)态或RRC空闲(idle)态。处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态的终端设备主要执行以下过程：监听寻呼PDCCH和RRM测量。
具体地，网络设备给终端设备配置一个寻呼不连续接收(discontinuous reception，DRX)周期，终端设备在一个寻呼DRX周期内只需要在一个寻呼时机(paging occasion，PO)监听寻呼PDCCH即可，在其他时候可以进入睡眠状态不去监听寻呼PDCCH。
终端设备监听寻呼PDCCH的流程包括：终端设备在自己的PO监听寻呼PDCCH，这里将用于承载寻呼DCI的PDCCH称为寻呼PDCCH。如果寻呼PDCCH承载的寻呼DCI指示有寻呼消息，则终端设备会接收并解析相应的PDSCH，寻呼PDCCH调度的PDSCH可以称为寻呼PDSCH。其中，寻呼PDSCH承载寻呼消息，寻呼DCI中也包括部分寻呼消息，比如短消息(short messages)。如果终端设备在寻呼PDCCH没有盲检到DCI，或者盲检到寻呼DCI，但是寻呼DCI指示没有调度PDSCH，则终端设备认为没有寻呼消息，从而进入睡眠状态，直到一个寻呼DRX周期之后的下一个寻呼时机，终端设备再唤醒监听寻呼PDCCH。
其中，终端设备监听的PO(或称为终端设备自己的或对应的PO)与终端设备的ID有关，因此不同的终端设备可能会监听不同的PO，也可能会监听相同的PO。终端设备的ID也可以称为UE_ID。在具体实现中，终端设备根据网络设备半静态配置的信息以及协 议中预先定义的公式，可以计算其对应的PO，即计算在哪些时域位置监听寻呼PDCCH。
如图2所示为终端设备在其寻呼时机监听寻呼PDCCH的示意图。
参考图2，一个终端设备在一个DRX周期内，在它计算的属于它自己的PO监听寻呼PDCCH，图2中，DRX周期＝1.28s，一个寻呼帧(paging frame)包括2个PO，终端设备1-终端设备10这10个终端设备在PO1监听寻呼PDCCH，一个周期之后，终端设备1-终端设备10会在PO3监听寻呼PDCCH。
其中，网络设备半静态配置的信息包括：
·寻呼DRX周期T；
·每个寻呼DRX周期T包括的寻呼帧的个数N(注意，N不是直接配置，而是通过配置信息推算得出的)；
·每个寻呼帧中的寻呼时机的个数Ns；
·用于计算寻呼帧的寻呼帧偏移PF_offset。
如上所述，终端设备监听的PO可以与终端设备的ID有关。NR中，终端设备的ID和第五代系统架构演进临时移动用户标识(5G SAE-temporary mobile subscription identifier，5G-S-TMSI)有关，其中，SAE表示系统架构演进(system architecture evolution)。如果终端设备没有5G-S-TMSI，终端设备的ID＝0，否则，终端设备ID＝5G-S-TMSI mod 1024。
终端设备监听寻呼PDCCH的无线帧(radio frame)的帧号(SFN)可以由式(1)确定：
(SFN+PF_offset)mod T＝(T div N)*(UE_ID mod N) (1)
其中，SFN表示终端设备监听寻呼PDCCH的无线帧的帧号，PF_offset表示终端设备用于计算的寻呼帧的寻呼帧偏移，T表示寻呼DRX周期，(SFN+PF_offset)mod T表示(SFN+PF_offset)除以T取余数，N表示每个寻呼DRX周期T包括的寻呼帧的个数，div表示除法运算，T div N表示T除以N所得的值，UE_ID表示终端设备的ID，(UE_ID mod N)表示终端设备的ID除以N取余数。
终端设备在计算出用于监听寻呼PDCCH的寻呼帧(帧号为：SFN)后，如果一个PF只包括1个PO，则终端设备监听这1个PO即可，如果一个寻呼帧包括多个PO，终端设备确定监听第(i_s+1)个PO，i_s由式(2)确定：
i_s＝floor(UE_ID/N)mod Ns  (2)
其中，UE_ID/N表示UE_ID除以N所得的值，floor(UE_ID/N)表示对UE_ID/N进行下取整，Ns表示每个寻呼帧中的寻呼时机的个数。
根据上述式(1)和式(2)，终端设备根据自身的UE_ID确认出要监听的PO。因此，不同的终端设备可能会映射到相同或不同的PO。
示例性地，针对具有相同寻呼DRX周期的终端设备，根据公式(1)，相同的终端设备会映射到同一个寻呼帧。在一个寻呼帧中，又包括Ns个PO。所以，如果映射到同一个寻呼帧中的多个终端设备计算的i_s也相同，那么这多个终端设备会映射到相同的PO。如图2中的UE1～UE10，这10个终端设备均监听PO1。
如果监听同一个PO的终端设备中存在终端设备被寻呼，网络设备会在该PO发送寻呼DCI，寻呼DCI会调度一个寻呼PDSCH。寻呼PDSCH中会携带被寻呼的终端设备的ID，如果终端设备在接收的PDSCH中匹配到自己的ID，则确认自己被寻呼；如果终端设 备在寻呼PDSCH中未匹配到自己的ID，则确认自己没有被寻呼。这些未在寻呼PDSCH中匹配到自己ID的终端设备就是发生了寻呼虚警。可见，产生寻呼虚警的终端设备是没必要接收并译码PDSCH的，导致功耗浪费。
针对这一功耗浪费问题，目前主要的一个方法是对监听相同PO的终端设备进一步分组，也就是分子组(sub-grouping)。例如，在寻呼DCI中指示监听该PO的终端设备中的一个或多个子组是否被寻呼，这样，指示未被寻呼的终端设备子组中的终端设备就能直接进入睡眠状态，不去继续接收并译码寻呼PDSCH，从而可以节省功耗。
一种分子组的方法是，根据UE_ID进行计算。例如，监听同一个PO的终端设备进一步分成M个子组，则终端设备所在的子组标识(sub-group ID)由式(3)确定：
Sub-group ID＝UE_ID mod M (3)
其中，Sub-group ID表示终端设备所在的子组标识，M表示对监听同一个PO的终端设备被划分的子组的个数，UE_ID mod M表示终端设备的ID对M取余。
然而，基于UE_ID进行分子组的方法，会将具有不同功耗敏感度(power consumption sensitivity，PCS)/设备类型/寻呼概率的终端设备分到同一个子组，无法区分对功耗敏感的终端设备是否被唤醒，这样不利于对功耗敏感的终端设备节省功耗。
本申请考虑基于一个或多个特征对监听同一PO的终端设备进行分组，使具有相同特征值的终端设备被分为相同的组，并对具有相同特征值的终端设备进一步分为多个子组。所述特征可以是如下中的一种：PCS、设备类型、或寻呼概率。针对某一个特征，不同的终端设备可能会具有不同的特征值。比如，针对寻呼概率这一特征，终端设备1的寻呼概率等于P1，终端设备2的寻呼概率等于P2，终端设备3的寻呼概率等于P1，P1不等于P2，那么认为终端设备1和终端设备3具有相同的特征值，终端设备2和终端设备1具有不同的特征值。再比如，针对设备类型这一特征，终端设备1的设备类型为NR eMBB UE，终端设备2的设备类型为NR RedCap UE，等等。
本申请也适用于监听同一PO的终端设备针对某一特征具有相同的特征值，先将监听同一PO的终端设备分成多个组，然后对每个组进一步分成多个子组。
如图3所示，为本申请提供的对具有相同特征的终端设备分配的比特的示意图。参考图3，对于监听相同的PO的终端设备，基于设备类型划分为设备类型1和设备类型2，并分别将其进一步划分为M1个子组和M2个子组。同时，将Q1个比特固定的分配给设备类型1，用于指示对应的M1个子组中被寻呼的终端设备子组。将Q2个比特固定的分配给设备类型2，用于指示对应的M2个子组中被寻呼的终端设备子组。
然而，当某一特征值对应的终端设备未被寻呼时，对应的比特也不能用给其他特征值对应的终端设备进行分组指示，导致比特资源的浪费；而且，对于某一特征值对应的终端设备，在不同时刻被寻呼的终端设备的数目在该特征值对应的总终端设备的数目所占的比例是不断变化的，因此，固定分配比特的方式在有些时刻的分组指示是不合适的。
如图4所示为本申请提供的在不同时刻，针对设备类型这一特征，被寻呼的终端设备的数目在具有某一特征值的总终端设备的数目所占的比例的示意图。设备类型具有特征值1和特征值2，也就是考虑设备类型1和设备类型2两种设备类型。
其中，图4中的(a)为在时刻1被寻呼的终端设备的数目在某一特征值对应的总终端设备的数目所占的比例的示意图；图4中的(b)为在时刻2被寻呼的终端设备的数目 在某一特征值对应的总终端设备的数目所占的比例的示意图；图4中的(c)为在时刻3被寻呼的终端设备的数目在某一特征值对应的总终端设备的数目所占的比例的示意图。
参考图4中的(a)，在时刻1，设备类型1中没有被寻呼的终端设备，此时，分配给设备类型1的比特资源也不能用给其他特征值对应的终端设备进行分组指示，导致该比特资源的浪费。
参考图4中的(b)，在时刻2，设备类型1和设备类型2中被寻呼的终端设备的数目比例都较少，此时，两种设备类型的终端设备进行分组指示都是必要的，可以分别降低每个设备类型下的终端设备的寻呼虚警概率。
参考图4中的(c)，在时刻3，设备类型1中的终端设备大部分被寻呼，显然，此时分配给设备类型1的Q1个比特资源是不合适的，这是由于在分组指示和不分组指示的情况下，被虚警的终端设备的数目基本是相同的，因此，即使利用Q1个比特资源对设备类型1中的终端设备进行分组指示，也没有减少被虚警的终端设备的数目，导致资源浪费。
本申请提供一种通信方法，可以充分利用有限的比特信令资源进行分组指示，减少资源的浪费。
如图5所示，为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法500的流程示意图，该方法500可以由网络设备和终端设备执行，或者也可以由网络设备中的芯片和终端设备中的芯片执行。该通信方法500可以包括：
510，网络设备发送第一信息，所述第一信息用于指示第一终端设备所属的第一终端设备组是否被寻呼。
520，所述网络设备发送第二信息，若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组被寻呼，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。
其中，该步骤510-520可以由图1中的网络设备10执行。
530，第一终端设备接收第一信息和第二信息，所述第一信息用于指示所述第一终端设备所属的第一终端设备组是否被寻呼。
540，若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组被寻呼，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼，所述第一终端设备所属的子组是所述至少两个子组中的一个，所述第一终端设备根据所述第二信息确定是否接收寻呼物理下行共享信道PDSCH，或确定是否监听寻呼物理下行控制信道PDCCH。
其中，该步骤530-540可以由图1中的终端设备20-40中的任一终端设备执行。
本申请实施例中，网络设备可以向第一终端设备发送两个信息，且第二信息所指示的内容可以根据第一信息所指示的内容确定。例如，若第一信息指示第一终端设备所属的第一终端设备组被寻呼，则第二信息用于指示第一终端设备组包括的至少两个子组被寻呼的情况。相应地，第一终端设备在接收到第一信息和第二信息后，可以根据第二信息所指示的内容确定是否接收PDSCH，或确定是否监听PDCCH。其中，第一终端设备确定是否接收的PDSCH是用于承载寻呼消息的PDSCH，第一终端设备确定是否监听的PDCCH是用于承载寻呼DCI的PDCCH，也就是用于调度所述PDSCH的PDCCH。
需要说明的是，本申请实施例中的第一终端设备组包括的至少两个子组可以理解为：第一终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组。当然，下文中的第一终端设备组包括的M个子组、M1个子组、M2个子组或M3个子组也可以理解为：第一终端设备组分别被划分的M 个子组、M1个子组、M2个子组或M3个子组；以及下文中的第二终端设备组包括的N个子组、N1个子组、N2个子组也可以理解为：第二终端设备组分别被划分的N个子组、N1个子组、N2个子组。
示例性地，假设第一终端设备组被划分为2个子组，分别为子组1和子组2，其中第一终端设备属于子组1。若第一信息指示第一终端设备组被寻呼，且第二信息指示子组1被寻呼，则第一终端设备可以确定本身所在的子组被寻呼，并确定接收寻呼PDSCH，或确定监听寻呼PDCCH；若第一信息指示第一终端设备组被寻呼，且第二信息指示子组1未被寻呼，则第一终端设备可以确定本身所在的子组未被寻呼，并确定不接收寻呼PDSCH，或确定不监听寻呼PDCCH。
本申请提供的方案，由于第二信息指示的内容与第一信息指示的内容有关，例如，在第一信息指示第一终端设备组被寻呼的情况下，则第二信息用于指示第一终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼，从而第一终端设备可以根据第二信息所指示的内容确定是否接收寻呼PDSCH，或确定是否监听寻呼PDCCH，而在第一信息指示第一终端设备组未被寻呼的情况下，第二信息可以不用于指示第一终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼，此时，第二信息可以被预留(reserved)或者用于指示其他功能，因此，可以更充分的利用第二信息包括的信令资源，可以减少信令资源的浪费。
可选地，在一些实施例中，若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组不被寻呼，则所述第二信息用于指示所述至少两个子组是否被寻呼且所述第二信息不生效，所述第一终端设备确定不接收所述PDSCH或确定不监听所述PDCCH。
本申请实施例中，若网络设备向第一终端设备发送的第一信息指示第一终端设备组不被寻呼，第二信息的功能还适用于指示第一终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼，但第二信息不生效。第一终端设备在接收到该第一信息和第二信息后，可以确定不接收PDSCH，或确定不监听PDCCH。
需要说明的是，本申请实施例中的“不生效”可以理解为：在第一信息指示第一终端设备组不被寻呼的情况下，不管第二信息所指示的内容，第一终端设备只根据第一信息就可以确定不接收PDSCH，或确定不监听PDCCH。第一终端设备可能会忽略第二信息，网络设备可以根据第一终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组未被寻呼来确定并发送第二信息，网络设备也可以不根据第一终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组未被寻呼来确定并发送第二信息，例如可以根据网络设备实现将第二信息设置成任意比特状态。
示例性地，假设第一终端设备组包括2个子组，分别为子组1和子组2，其中第一终端设备属于子组1。若第一信息指示第一终端设备组未被寻呼，则第一终端设备可以确定本身所在的子组未被寻呼，并确定不接收寻呼PDSCH，或确定不监听寻呼PDCCH。第二信息用于指示子组1和子组2均未被寻呼，但第二信息不生效。
可以理解的是，第二信息可以包括1个或多个信息域，当第二信息包括多个信息域时，第二信息不生效是指用于指示第一终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼的信息域不生效，并不影响其他信息域，也就是说第二信息所指示的其他功能仍然生效。
此外，在一些实施例中，若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组不被寻呼，则所述第二信息包括的和第一终端设备组对应的信息域设置为特定状态或被预留，所述第一终端设备确定不接收所述PDSCH或确定不监听所述PDCCH。
本申请实施例中，若网络设备向第一终端设备发送的第一信息指示第一终端设备组不被寻呼，则第二信息包括的和第一终端设备组对应的信息域设置为特定状态或被预留。第一终端设备在接收到该第一信息和第二信息后，可以确定不接收PDSCH，或确定不监听PDCCH。
需要说明的是，本申请实施例中的“设置为特定状态或被预留”可以理解为：在第一信息指示第一终端设备组不被寻呼的情况下，第二信息包括的和第一终端设备组对应的信息域不被用于指示第一终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼，而是“设置为特定状态或被预留”。“特定状态”可以由协议预先定义。将一个信息域设置为特定状态的目的为提高PDCCH传输的可靠性，降低误码率，UE可以根据该信息域判断解析的DCI是否是虚警DCI。例如，如果所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组不被寻呼，但解析后，第二信息包括的该信息域不是所述特定状态，则UE就可以认为解析的DCI为虚警DCI，是错误信息。信息域“被预留”表示该信息域当前不承载任何功能，可以用于以后指示其他功能。
本申请提供的方案，在第一信息指示第一终端设备组不被寻呼的情况下，则第二信息指示第一终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼且不生效，从而第一终端设备可以确定不接收寻呼PDSCH，或确定不监听寻呼PDCCH，因此，当第一信息和第二信息由不同的信道/信号承载时，第一终端设备可以只接收第一信息，不接收第二信息，可以减少功耗的浪费。或者，在第一信息指示第一终端设备组不被寻呼的情况下，第二信息包括的和第一终端设备组对应的信息域设置为特定状态，可以提高PDCCH传输的可靠性。或者，在第一信息指示第一终端设备组不被寻呼的情况下，第二信息包括的和第一终端设备组对应的信息域被预留，可以用于以后指示其他功能，从而可以避免比特信令资源浪费，提高信令资源利用率。
上文指出，第一信息可以用于指示第一终端设备所属的第一终端设备组是否被寻呼，在实际场景中，第一信息还可以指示其它终端设备组是否被寻呼，具体请参见下文。
可选地，在一些实施例中，所述第一信息还用于指示第二终端设备所属的第二终端设备组是否被寻呼。
其中，本申请实施例中的第一终端设备组和第二终端设备组包括的终端设备的特征可以不同，第一终端设备组包括的终端设备的特征相同，第二终端设备组包括的终端设备的特征相同。此外，在一些实施例中，第一终端设备组和第二终端设备组包括的终端设备的特征也可以相同，不予限制。
可以理解的是，两个终端设备的特征相同或不同，是针对终端设备的某一个或某些特征而言，并非表示终端设备的所有特征均相同或均不同。
本申请实施例中的特征可以包括终端设备的类型、终端设备对功耗的敏感度(power consumption sensitivity，PCS)、终端设备的被寻呼概率。
(1)终端设备的类型
示例性地，第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd generation partnership project，3GPP)研究降低能力的终端设备类型(reduced capability UE，RedCap UE)，此外，NR UE还包括增强移动带宽终端设备(enhanced mobile broadband UE，eMBBUE)，超可靠低延迟通信终端设备(ultra reliable low latency communication UE，URLLC UE)。需要说明的是，在一些实 施例中，可以将除RedCap UE之外的NR UE称为NR normal/legacy UE，或者normal UE包括eMBBUE，或包括URLLC UE，或包括eMBB and URLLC UE，不予限制。
其中，与normal/legacy UE相比，RedCap UE对电池续航的要求更高。也就是说，RedCap UE对功率消耗更敏感。
RedCap UE主要包括3种设备，可穿戴设备(wearables)，工业无线传感器(intustrial wireless sensors)和视频监控(video surveillance)设备。这3种设备对电池续航的要求如下表1所示。
表1
Figure PCTCN2021072284-appb-000001
本申请考虑终端设备类型这一特征，以RedCap UE和normal UE为例，则第一终端设备所属的第一终端设备组和第二终端设备所属的第二终端设备组可以为RedCap UE组和normal UE组。即：第一终端设备组可以为RedCap UE组以及第二终端设备组为normal UE组；或者，第一终端设备组可以为normal UE组以及第二终端设备组为RedCapUE组。
可以理解的是，本申请实施例中的RedCap UE组可以为RedCap UE形成的组，normal UE组可以为normal UE形成的组。
(2)终端设备对功耗的敏感度
示例性地，可以将对功耗敏感的终端设备分为一组，可以称之为功耗敏感组；对功耗不敏感的终端设备分为一组，可以称之为功耗不敏感组。则第一终端设备组和第二终端设备组分别为功耗敏感组和功耗不敏感组。即：第一终端设备组可以为功耗敏感组以及第二终端设备组为功耗不敏感组；或者，第一终端设备组可以为功耗不敏感组以及第二终端设备组为功耗敏感组。
示例性地，可以将终端设备对功耗的敏感度分为多个等级，如PCS level 1和PCS level 2，则第一终端设备组和第二终端设备组分别为PCS level 1和PCS level 2所对应的终端设备组。即：第一终端设备组可以为PCS level 1所对应的终端设备组以及第二终端设备组为PCS level 2所对应的终端设备组；或者，第一终端设备组可以为PCS level 2所对应的终端设备组以及第二终端设备组为PCS level 1所对应的终端设备组。
需要说明的是，上述对终端设备功耗敏感度的级别的划分仅为举例说明，在一些实施例中，还可以划分为3个或4个或其它数量的等级，不予限制。
(3)终端设备的被寻呼概率
示例性地，可以将被寻呼概率相同或相近的终端设备分为一组，如将寻呼概率为P1的终端设备(如手机等)分为子组1，将寻呼概率为P2的终端设备(如工业无线传感器)分为子组2。则第一终端设备组和第二终端设备组分别为子组1和子组2。即：第一终端设备组可以为子组1以及第二终端设备组为子组2；或者，第一终端设备组可以为子组2以及第二终端设备组为子组1。
上文说明了第一信息可以用于指示第一终端设备所属的第一终端设备组是否被寻呼，还可以用于指示第二终端设备所属的第二终端设备组是否被寻呼。在这种情况下，第二信息用于指示第一终端设备组和/或第二终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。如下介绍包括第一信息和第二信息的多种实现方式。
方式一：
所述第二信息包括第一信息域和第二信息域，所述第一信息域为所述第一终端设备组对应的信息域，所述第二信息域为所述第二终端设备组对应的信息域；
若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组均被寻呼，所述第一信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M1个子组是否被寻呼，所述第二信息域用于指示所述第二终端设备组包括的N1个子组是否被寻呼；或，
若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组被寻呼，且指示所述第二终端设备组未被寻呼，所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M2个子组是否被寻呼，且所述M2大于所述M1。
本申请实施例以第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组分别为RedCap UE组和normal UE组为例，假设第一终端设备组为RedCap UE组，第二终端设备组为normal UE组。
方式一的情况一：
若第一信息指示RedCap UE组和normal UE组均被寻呼，则与RedCap UE组对应的第一信息域用于指示RedCap UE组包括的M1个子组是否被寻呼，与normal UE组对应的第二信息域用于指示normal UE组包括的N1个子组是否被寻呼。
示例性地，若第一信息指示RedCap UE组和normal UE组均被寻呼，假设RedCap UE组和normal UE组均包括10个子组，则第一信息域用于指示RedCap UE组包括的10个子组是否被寻呼，第二信息域用于指示normal UE组包括的10个子组是否被寻呼。
方式一的情况二：
若第一信息指示RedCap UE组被寻呼，且指示normal UE组未被寻呼，则与RedCap UE组对应的第一信息域和与normal UE组对应的第二信息域指示RedCap UE组包括的M2个子组是否被寻呼。
示例性地，若第一信息指示RedCap UE组被寻呼，且指示normal UE组未被寻呼，则第一信息域和第二信息域可以指示RedCap UE组包括的M2个子组是否被寻呼。在这种情况下，由于第一信息域和第二信息域包括的比特个数一般多于第一信息域包括的比特个数，换句话说，RedCap UE组可以包括的子组的个数大于上述方式一的情况一中RedCap UE组包括的子组的个数。例如，在上述方式一的情况一中，RedCap UE组包括10个子组，则在该情况二中，RedCap UE组可以包括20个子组，则第一信息域和第二信息域可以指示RedCap UE组包括的20个子组是否被寻呼。
应理解，上述数值仅为举例说明，还可以为其它数值，不应对本申请造成特别限定。
本申请提供的方案，在第一信息指示第一终端设备组被寻呼且第二终端设备组未被寻呼时，第二信息包括的第一信息域和第二信息域用于指示第一终端设备组包括的M2个子组是否寻呼，由于M2大于M1，增加了被寻呼的终端设备组被划分的子组的数量，可以降低终端设备的寻呼虚警概率，进一步地，可以减少终端设备的功耗的浪费。
可选的，若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组和第二终端设备组均未被寻呼，所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域可以被设置为特定状态或被预留或用于指示其他功能。
本申请实施例中，若第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组和第二终端设备组均未被寻呼，第一信息域和第二信息域可以均被设置为特定状态或被预留或用于指示其他功能；或者，第一信息域和第二信息域的其中一个被设置为特定状态，另一个被预留；或者，其中一个被设置为特定状态，另一个用于指示其他功能；或者，其中一个被预留，另一个用于指示其他功能。
在一些实施例中，所述第二信息包括第一信息域和第二信息域，所述第一信息域为所述第一终端设备组对应的信息域，所述第二信息域为所述第二终端设备组对应的信息域；
若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组被寻呼，所述第一信息域用于指示所述M个子组是否被寻呼；
若所述第一信息指示所述第二终端设备组被寻呼，所述第二信息域用于指示所述第二终端设备组被划分的N个子组是否被寻呼。
示例性地，以第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组分别为RedCap UE组和normal UE组为例，若第一信息指示RedCap UE组被寻呼，假设RedCap UE组包括10个子组，则第一信息域用于指示RedCap UE组包括的10个子组是否被寻呼；若第一信息指示normal UE组被寻呼，假设normal UE组包括10个子组，第二信息域用于指示normal UE组包括的10个子组是否被寻呼。
应理解，若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组被寻呼，不管所述第二终端设备组是否指示被寻呼，所述第一信息域用于指示所述M个子组是否被寻呼；若所述第一信息指示所述第二终端设备组被寻呼，不管所述第一终端设备组是否指示被寻呼，所述第二信息域用于指示所述N个子组是否被寻呼。
应理解，所述第一信息包括的信息域和所述第二信息包括的信息域可由网络设备预先配置，或由协议预先定义，比如，信息域的比特个数，以及各信息域与不同的终端设备组或子组之间的对应关系。
上述第一信息指示的终端设备组的数量仅为示例性说明，还可以用于指示多于3个终端设备组，例如，4个或5个终端设备组，不予限制。
方式二：
所述通信方法500还可以包括：
网络设备向第一终端设备发送第三信息，所述第三信息用于指示所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组的分组指示优先级，所述分组指示优先级用于确定优先被第二信息分组指示的终端设备组。
第一终端设备接收第三信息。
上述步骤540中所述第一终端设备根据所述第二信息确定是否接收寻呼PDSCH，或确定是否监听寻呼PDCCH，包括：第一终端设备根据所述第二信息和所述第三信息确定是否接收所述PDSCH，或确定是否监听所述寻呼PDCCH。
本申请实施例中，网络设备可以向第一终端设备发送用于指示所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组的分组指示优先级的第三信息，第一终端设备可以根据该第三信息和上述第二信息确定是否接收寻呼PDSCH，或确定是否监听寻呼PDCCH。
可选地，在一些实施例中，所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组的分组指示优先级是由协议预先定义的。例如，协议预先定义RedCap UE组的分组指示优先级高于Normal UE组。
本申请实施例中，第三信息用于指示第一终端设备组和第二终端设备组的分组指示优先级也可以称为：第三信息用于配置第一终端设备组和第二终端设备组的分组指示优先级，不予限制。
例如，第三信息可以承载于RRC信令中，由网络设备半静态配置。或者，第三信息可以承载于第一DCI或第一MAC CE中，由网络设备动态指示。
其中，第三信息承载于第一DCI中时，可以和第一信息和/或第二信息位于同一个DCI，或不同的DCI。
本申请提供的方案，可以通过第三信息指示或协议预先定义第一终端设备组和第二终端设备组的分组指示优先级，从而使得分组指示优先级高的终端设备组优先被分组指示，进而优先降低分组指示优先级高的终端设备的寻呼虚警概率。特别是对于功耗更为敏感的终端设备组，可以在有限信令资源和终端设备节能效果之间取得较好折中，从而可以提高信令资源的使用效率。
方式二的情况一：
若所述第一终端设备组的分组指示优先级高于所述第二终端设备组，
若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组被寻呼，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼；或，
若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组未被寻呼，且指示所述第二终端设备组被寻呼，所述第二信息用于指示所述第二终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。
本申请仍以第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组分别为RedCap UE组和normal UE组为例，假设第一终端设备组为RedCap UE组，第二终端设备组为normal UE组。例如，第二信息由DCI承载，第二信息包括一个信息域(示例性地，该一个信息域可以包括4个比特)，该信息域的比特个数和该信息域在DCI中的比特位置可由网络设备半静态配置。
若第一信息指示RedCap UE组被寻呼，由于RedCap UE组的分组指示优先级高于normal UE组，因此，第二信息用于指示RedCap UE组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。在这种情况下，不管normal UE组是否被寻呼，第二信息均用于指示RedCap UE组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。
若第一信息指示RedCap UE组未被寻呼，且normal UE组被寻呼，第二信息用于指示normal UE组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。由于RedCap UE组的分组指示优先级高于normal UE组，在RedCap UE组未被寻呼的情况下，若normal UE组被寻呼，则第二信息可以用于指示normal UE组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。
本申请提供的方案，若第一终端设备组的分组指示优先级高于第二终端设备，在第一终端设备组被寻呼时，第二信息指示第一终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼；在第一终端设备未被寻呼时，若第二终端设备组被寻呼，第二信息指示第二终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。从而使得第一终端设备组可以优先被分组指示，特别是对于功耗更为敏感的终端设备组，可以在有限信令资源和终端设备节能效果之间取得较好折中，从而可以提高信令资源的使用效率。
方式二的情况二：
如上所述，第二信息包括一个信息域。某些实施例中，第二信息也可以包括2个信息域，称为第一信息域和第二信息域(示例性地，该第一信息域和第二信息域可以分别包括2个比特)，分别与第一终端设备组和第二终端设备组对应。第一信息域和第二信息域可由网络设备半静态配置。
若第三信息指示或协议预先定义第一终端设备组的分组指示优先级高于所述第二终端设备组，则：
若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组被寻呼，所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼；或，
若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组未被寻呼，且指示所述第二终端设备组被寻呼，所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示所述第二终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。
若第三信息指示或协议预先定义第一终端设备组的分组指示优先级等于所述第二终端设备组，则：
若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组和所述第一终端设备组均被寻呼，所述第一信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼，所述第二信息域用于指示所述第二终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼；或，
若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组被寻呼，且指示所述第二终端设备组未被寻呼，所述第一信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼，或所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼；或，
若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组未被寻呼，且指示所述第二终端设备组被寻呼，所述第二信息域用于指示所述第二终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼，或所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示所述第二终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。
因此，可以根据分组指示优先级确定第二信息用于指示哪个或哪些终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。
可选的，当所述第三信息和所述第二信息位于同一个DCI时，所述第三信息立即生效，即作用于同一个DCI中的第二信息。
可选的，当所述第三信息和所述第二信息由不同的信令承载时，所述第三信息生效于之后的DCI中的第二信息，其生效时间直到终端设备收到下一个第三信息为止。在第三信息的生效时间内，终端设备根据当前的第三信息确定所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组的分组指示优先级。
在一些实施例中，第一信息也可以用于指示第一终端设备组、第二终端设备组和第三终端设备组是否被寻呼，相应地，第二信息可以根据第一信息所指示的内容指示这3个终端设备包括的子组是否被寻呼。
示例性地，若第一终端设备组的分组指示优先级高于第二终端设备组，第二终端设备组的分组指示优先级高于第三终端设备组。
若第一信息指示第一终端设备组被寻呼，则第二信息包括的第一信息域、第二信息域 以及第三信息域用于指示第一终端设备组包括的子组是否被寻呼。其中，第一信息域为与第一终端设备对应的信息域，第二信息域为与第二终端设备组对应的信息域，第三信息域为与第三终端设备组对应的信息域。
若第一信息指示第一终端设备组未被寻呼，且第二终端设备组被寻呼，则第一信息域、第二信息域以及第三信息域用于指示第二终端设备组包括的子组是否被寻呼；或者，第一信息和第二信息域用于指示第一终端设备组包括的子组是否被寻呼，第三信息域被预留或设置为特定状态。
若第一信息指示第一终端设备组和第二终端设备组未被寻呼，且第三终端设备组被寻呼，则第一信息域、第二信息域以及第三信息域用于指示第三终端设备组包括的子组是否被寻呼。
上述第一信息指示的终端设备组的数量仅为示例性说明，还可以用于指示多于3个终端设备组，例如，4个或5个终端设备组，不予限制。
方式三：
协议预先定义或网络设备半静态配置第一信息包括的信息域，以及第一信息包括的信息域中分别与第一终端设备组和第二终端设备组对应的字段。协议预先定义或网络设备半静态配置按照一定的先后顺序，在前指示被寻呼的终端设备组优先被分组指示，在后指示被寻呼的终端设备组不进行分组指示，第二信息用于指示在前指示被寻呼的终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。例如，所述先后顺序按照字段在DCI中所在的位置从左到右(或从右到左)的顺序。如下按照字段在DCI中所在的位置从左到右的顺序举例。
所述第一信息包括的第P个字段对应第一终端设备组，第Q个字段对应第二终端设备组，所述P和Q为正整数，所述P小于Q。应理解，若P小于Q，则认为在DCI中，第P个字段在第Q个字段前面，若Q小于P，则认为在DCI中，第Q个字段在第P个字段前面。此处以P小于Q为例。
若所述第P个字段为目标状态，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼；或，
若所述第P个字段为非目标状态，所述第Q个字段为目标状态，所述第二信息用于指示所述第二终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。
本申请实施例中的第P个字段和/或第Q个字段可以包括1个比特或多个比特等，不予限制。
假设第P个字段和第Q个字段均包括1个比特，若第P个字段为目标状态(如第P个字段设置为“1”)，则可以认为第一终端设备组被寻呼。在这种情况下，不管第Q个字段处于何种状态，第二信息都用于指示第一终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。
若第P个字段为非目标状态(如第P个字段设置为“0”)且第Q个字段为目标状态(如第Q个字段设置为“1”)，则可以认为第一终端设备组未被寻呼且第二终端设备组被寻呼，则第二信息用于指示第二终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。
类似地，假设第P个字段和第Q个字段均包括2个比特，若第P个字段为目标状态(如第P个字段设置为“00”)，则可以认为第一终端设备组被寻呼。在这种情况下，不管第Q个字段处于何种状态，第二信息都用于指示第一终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组 是否被寻呼。
若第P个字段为非目标状态(如第P个字段设置为“01”或“10”或“11”)且第Q个字段为目标状态(如第Q个字段设置为“00”)，则可以认为第一终端设备组未被寻呼且第二终端设备组被寻呼，则第二信息用于指示第二终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。
应理解，上述目标状态和非目标状态可以由协议预先定义，或由网络设备半静态配置。
还应理解，上述目标状态和/或非目标状态可以包括1个状态值，或多个状态值，不予限制。
例如，假设第P个字段和第Q个字段均包括2个比特，目标状态包括3个状态值，为“01”、“10”和“11”，非目标状态包括1个状态值，为“00”。
再例如，假设第P个字段包括1个比特，第Q个字段包括2个比特，第P个字段对应的目标状态为“1”，非目标状态为“0”，第Q个字段对应的目标状态包括3个状态值，为“01”、“10”和“11”，非目标状态包括1个状态值，为“00”。
可选的，若所述第P个字段和所述第Q个字段均为非目标状态，第二信息包括的信息域可以被设置为特定状态或被预留或用于指示其他功能。
本申请提供的方案，若第P个字段为目标状态，第二信息用于指示第一终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼；在第P个字段为非目标状态，若第Q个字段为目标状态，第二信息用于指示第二终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。从而使得与第P个字段对应的第一终端设备组可以优先被分组指示，特别是对于功耗更为敏感的终端设备组，可以在有限信令资源和终端设备节能效果之间取得较好折中，从而可以提高信令资源的使用效率。
在一些实施例中，第一信息也可以用于指示第一终端设备组、第二终端设备组和第三终端设备组是否被寻呼，相应地，第二信息可以根据第一信息包括的字段的状态指示这3个终端设备包括的子组是否被寻呼。
示例性地，第一信息包括的第P个字段对应第一终端设备组，第Q个字段对应第二终端设备组，第R个字段对应第三终端设备，所述P、Q、R为正整数，所述P小于Q，所述Q小于R。
若所述第P个字段为目标状态，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼；
若所述第P个字段为非目标状态，所述第Q个字段为目标状态，所述第二信息用于指示所述第二终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼；
若所述第P个字段和第Q个字段为非目标状态，所述第R个字段为目标状态，所述第二信息用于指示所述第三终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。
假设第P个字段和第Q个字段均包括1个比特，若第P个字段为目标状态(如第P个字段设置为“1”)，则可以认为第一终端设备组被寻呼。在这种情况下，不管第Q个字段和第R个字段处于何种状态，第二信息都用于指示第一终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。
若第P个字段为非目标状态(如第P个字段设置为“0”)且第Q个字段为目标状态(如第Q个字段设置为“1”)，则可以认为第一终端设备组未被寻呼且第二终端设备组 被寻呼，不管第Q个字段处于何种状态，则第二信息可以用于指示第二终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。
若第P个字段和第Q个字段为非目标状态(如第P个字段和第Q个字段设置为“0”)且第R个字段为目标状态(如第R个字段设置为“1”)，则可以认为第一终端设备组和第二终端设备组均未被寻呼且第三终端设备组被寻呼，则第二信息可以用于指示第三终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。
方式四：
所述通信方法500还可以包括：
所述网络设备发送第四信息，若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组均被寻呼，所述第四信息用于指示与所述第一终端设备组对应的信息域，和与所述第二终端设备组对应的信息域。
第一终端设备接收第四信息。
上述步骤540中所述第一终端设备根据所述第二信息确定是否接收寻呼PDSCH，或确定是否监听寻呼PDCCH，包括：所述第一终端设备根据所述第二信息和所述第四信息确定是否接收所述寻呼PDSCH，或确定是否监听所述寻呼PDCCH。
本申请实施例中，网络设备可以向第一终端设备发送用于指示分别与第一终端设备组和与第二终端设备组对应的信息域的第四信息，在第一信息指示第一终端设备组和第二终端设备组均被寻呼的情况下，第四信息可以用于指示分别与其对应的信息域，第一终端设备可以根据该第四信息和上述第二信息确定是否接收寻呼PDSCH，或确定是否监听寻呼PDCCH。
应理解，所述第二信息可以包括一个或多个信息域，所述第四信息用于从所述第二信息包括的信息域中指示与所述第一终端设备组对应的信息域，和与所述第二终端设备组对应的信息域。
根据第四信息的指示，与所述第一终端设备组对应的信息域用于指示第一终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼，与所述第二终端设备组对应的信息域用于指示第二终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。
所述第二信息包括的信息域可预先由网络设备半静态配置，或由协议预先定义。
示例性地，在第一信息指示第一终端设备组和第二终端设备组均被寻呼的情况下，第四信息可以用于指示与第一终端设备组和第二终端设备组对应的信息域。如第二信息包括的信息域一共有20个比特，第四信息可以指示与第一终端设备组对应的信息域为10个比特，与第二终端设备组对应的信息域也为10个比特；或者，第四信息可以指示与第一终端设备组对应的信息域为15个比特，与第二终端设备组对应的信息域也为5个比特；或者，第四信息可以指示与第一终端设备组对应的信息域为20个比特，与第二终端设备组对应的信息域也为0个比特；不予限制。
应理解，当一个终端设备组对应的信息域有0个比特时，表示第二信息中不包括该终端设备组对应的信息域，当第一信息指示该终端设备组被寻呼时，第二信息不用于该终端设备组的分组指示，即不用于指示该终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。
本申请提供的方案，网络设备可以发送用于指示与终端设备组对应的信息域的第四信息，通过第四信息动态指示与终端设备组对应的信息域，可以灵活确定被寻呼的终端设备 组的分组的数量，可以降低终端设备的寻呼虚警概率，进一步地，可以减少终端设备的功耗的浪费。
方式四的情况一：
例一：
所述第二信息包括第一信息域和第二信息域，若第一信息指示第一终端设备组和第二终端设备组均被寻呼，
若所述第四信息包括的信息域为第一状态，所述第四信息指示所述第一信息域与所述第一终端设备组对应，且所述第二信息域与所述第二终端设备组对应，所述第一信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M1个子组是否被寻呼，所述第二信息域用于指示所述第二终端设备组包括的N1个子组是否被寻呼；或，
若所述第四信息包括的信息域为第二状态，所述第四信息指示所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域与所述第一终端设备组对应，所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M2个子组是否被寻呼，所述M2大于所述M1。
本申请实施例中的第四信息包括的信息域可以包括第一状态和第二状态，在不同的状态下，分别与所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组对应的信息域不同，进而，第二信息包括的信息域用于指示的终端设备组包括的子组的个数不同。
本申请仍以第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组分别为RedCap UE组和normal UE组为例，假设第一终端设备组为RedCap UE组，第二终端设备组为normal UE组。
若第四信息包括的信息域为第一状态(例如，第四信息包括的信息域的状态为“0”)，则第四信息指示所述第一信息域与RedCap UE组对应，所述第一信息域用于指示RedCap UE组包括的M1个子组是否被寻呼，所述第二信息域与normal UE组对应，所述第二信息域用于指示normal UE组包括的N1个子组是否被寻呼。
示例性地，若第四信息包括的信息域的状态为“0”，假设根据第一信息域和第二信息域，RedCap UE组和normal UE组均包括10个子组，则第一信息域用于指示RedCap UE组包括的10个子组是否被寻呼，第二信息域用于指示normal UE组包括的10个子组是否被寻呼。
若第四信息包括的信息域为第二状态(例如，第四信息包括的信息域的状态为“1”)，则第四信息指示所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域与RedCap UE组对应，所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示RedCap UE组包括的M2个子组是否被寻呼。
示例性地，若第四信息包括的信息域的状态为“1”，则第一信息域和第二信息域可以指示RedCap UE组包括的M2子组是否被寻呼。在这种情况下，RedCap UE组可以包括的子组的个数大于上述只用第一信息域指示RedCap UE组包括的子组的个数。例如，上述用第一信息域指示RedCap UE组包括的子组的个数为10，则在该情况下，用第一信息域和第二信息域指示的RedCap UE组可以包括的子组个数为20，因此，第一信息域和第二信息域用于指示RedCap UE组包括的20个子组是否被寻呼。
应理解，上述数值仅为举例说明，在一些实施例中，还可以为其它数值，不应对本申请造成特别限定。
还应理解，第四信息包括的信息域的比特个数可由网络设备半静态配置，或由协议预先定义；所述第一状态和第二状态可以由协议预先定义，或由网络设备半静态配置。
应理解，所述第一状态和/或第二状态可以包括1个状态值，或多个状态值，不予限制。
例如，第四信息包括的信息域有1个比特，该比特置成“1”表示第一状态，该比特置成“0”表示第二状态。
再例如，第四信息包括的信息域有2个比特，这2个比特置成“00”表示第一状态，置成“01”表示第二状态；或着，这2个比特置成“00”表示第一状态，置成“01”或“10”或“11”表示第二状态。
本申请提供的方案，在第四信息包括的信息域为第二状态的情况下，第四信息指示第一信息域和第二信息域与第一终端设备组对应，且第一信息域和第二信息域用于指示第一终端设备组包括的M2个子组是否被寻呼。通过第四信息动态指示与终端设备组对应的信息域，可以灵活增加被寻呼的终端设备组的分组的数量，可以降低终端设备的寻呼虚警概率，进一步地，可以减少终端设备的功耗的浪费。
例二：
所述第二信息包括第一信息域和第二信息域，若第一信息指示第一终端设备组和第二终端设备组均被寻呼，
若所述第四信息包括的信息域为第三状态，所述第四信息指示所述第一信息域与所述第一终端设备组对应，且所述第二信息域与所述第二终端设备组对应，所述第一信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M1个子组是否被寻呼，所述第二信息用于指示所述第二终端设备组包括的N1个子组是否被寻呼；或，
若所述第四信息包括的信息域为第四状态，所述第四信息指示所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域与所述第一终端设备组对应，所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M2个子组是否被寻呼，所述M2大于所述M1；或，
若所述第四信息包括的信息域为第五状态，所述第四信息指示所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域与所述第二终端设备组对应，所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示所述第二终端设备组包括的N2个子组是否被寻呼，所述N2大于所述N1。
本申请实施例中的第四信息包括的信息域可以包括第三状态、第四状态或第五状态，在不同的状态下，分别与所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组对应的信息域不同，进而，第二信息包括的信息域用于指示的终端设备组包括的子组的个数不同。
本申请实施例仍以第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组分别为RedCap UE组和normal UE组为例，假设第一终端设备组为RedCap UE组，第二终端设备组为normal UE组。
若第四信息包括的信息域为第三状态(例如，第三信息包括的信息域的状态为“00”)，则第四信息指示所述第一信息域与RedCap UE组对应，所述第一信息域用于指示RedCap UE组被划分的M1个子组是否被寻呼，所述第二信息域与normal UE组对应，所述第二信息域用于指示normal UE组被划分的N1个子组是否被寻呼。
示例性地，若第四信息包括的信息域的状态为“00”，假设根据第一信息域和第二信息域，RedCap UE组和normal UE组均被划分为10个子组，则第一信息域用于指示RedCap UE组被划分的10个子组是否被寻呼，第二信息域用于指示normal UE组被划分的10个子组是否被寻呼。
若第四信息包括的信息域为第四状态(例如，第四信息包括的信息域的状态为“01”)，则第四信息指示所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域与RedCap UE组对应，所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示RedCap UE组被划分的M2个子组是否被寻呼。
示例性地，若第四信息包括的信息域的状态为“01”，则第一信息域和第二信息域可以指示RedCap UE组被划分的M2个子组是否被寻呼。在这种情况下，RedCap UE组可以被划分的子组的个数大于上述只用第一信息域指示RedCap UE组被划分的子组的个数。例如，上述用第一信息域指示RedCap UE组被划分的子组的个数为10，则在该情况下，用第一信息域和第二信息域指示的RedCap UE组可以被划分的子组个数为20，因此，第一信息域和第二信息域用于指示RedCap UE组被划分的20个子组是否被寻呼。
若第四信息包括的信息域为第五状态(例如，第四信息包括的信息域的状态为“10”)，则第四信息指示所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域与normal UE组对应，所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示normal UE组被划分的N2个子组是否被寻呼。
示例性地，若第四信息包括的信息域的状态为“10”，则第一信息域和第二信息域可以指示normal UE组包括的N2个子组是否被寻呼。在这种情况下，normal UE组可以包括的子组的个数大于上述只用第二信息域指示normal UE组包括的子组的个数。例如，上述用第二信息域指示normal UE组包括的子组的个数为10，则在该情况下，用第一信息域和第二信息域指示的normal UE组可以包括的子组个数为20，因此，第一信息域和第二信息域用于指示normal UE组包括的20个子组是否被寻呼。
应理解，上述数值仅为举例说明，在一些实施例中，还可以为其它数值，不应对本申请造成特别限定。
应理解，第四信息包括的信息域的比特个数可由网络设备半静态配置，或由协议预先定义；所述第三状态、第四状态和第五状态可以由协议预先定义，或由网络设备半静态配置。
应理解，所述第三状态、第四状态、第五状态中的任意一个状态可以包括1个状态值，或多个状态值，不予限制。
例如，第四信息包括的信息域有2个比特，这两个比特置成“11”表示第三状态，置成“10”表示第四状态，置成“01”表示第五状态。可选的，这两个比特置成“00”这个状态被预留或用于指示其他功能。
本申请提供的方案，在第四信息包括的信息域为第四状态或第五状态的情况下，第四信息指示第一信息域和第二信息域与第一终端设备组对应或第二终端设备组对应，且第一信息域和第二信息域用于指示第一终端设备组包括的M2个子组是否被寻呼或用于指示第二终端设备组包括的N2个子组是否被寻呼。通过第四信息动态指示与终端设备组对应的信息域，可以灵活增加被寻呼的终端设备组的分组的数量，可以降低终端设备的寻呼虚警概率，进一步地，可以减少终端设备的功耗的浪费。
例三：
本申请实施例中，若第一信息指示第一终端设备组和第二终端设备组均被寻呼，第四信息用于指示第二信息包括的信息域所对应的比特数在第一终端设备组和第二终端设备组之间的分配比例。
所述第二信息包括一个信息域，该信息域有N个比特，在第一信息指示第一终端设备 组和第二终端设备组均被寻呼的情况下，第四信息用于指示一个比例系数，用a表示，则所述N个比特中有a*N个比特与所述第一终端设备组对应，另外(N-a)*N个比特与所述第二终端设备组对应。可选的，所述N个比特中从左边(或从右边)第一个比特开始连续a*N个比特与所述第一终端设备组对应，另外(N-a)*N个比特与所述第二终端设备组对应。
可选的，a的取值范围由协议预先定义或预先由网络设备半静态配置。
可选的，a的取值范围为0和1之间的小数，例如2/3,1/2,1/4,1/6等。
可选的，a的取值范围包括0和/或1。当a＝0时，表示0个比特与第一终端设备组对应，即第一终端设备组不被分组指示，第二信息的全部N个比特用于指示第二终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。当a＝1时，表示0个比特与第二终端设备组对应，即第二终端设备组不被分组指示，第二信息的全部N个比特用于指示第一终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。
作为另一种实现方式，比例系数a为大于1的正数或正整数，则所述N个比特中有N/a个比特与所述第一终端设备组对应，另外N-N/a个比特与所述第二终端设备组对应。可选的，所述N个比特中从左边(或从右边)第一个比特开始连续N/a个比特与所述第一终端设备组对应，另外N-N/a个比特与所述第二终端设备组对应。
可选的，a的取值范围包括1。当a＝1时，表示0个比特与第二终端设备组对应，即第二终端设备组不被分组指示，第二信息的全部N个比特用于指示第一终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。
应理解，不管哪一种实现方式，a*N或N/a所计算出的值为整数。
例如，第二信息包括的信息域有10个比特，即N＝10，a的取值范围包括：[1,4/5,2/5,0]。
第二信息包括的信息域中与第一终端设备组对应的比特用于指示所述第一终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼，与第二终端设备组对应的比特用于指示所述第二终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。
本申请实施例中的第四信息可以动态指示一个比例系数a，在不同的比例系数下，分别与所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组对应的比特个数不同，进而，第一终端设备组和第二终端设备组被划分的子组的个数不同。
本申请提供的方案，通过第四信息动态指示第二信息包括的信息域中与终端设备组对应的比特个数，可以灵活增加被寻呼的终端设备组的分组的数量，可以降低终端设备的寻呼虚警概率，进一步地，可以减少终端设备的功耗的浪费。
上述第一信息指示的终端设备组的数量仅为示例性说明，还可以用于指示多于3个终端设备组，例如，4个或5个终端设备组，不予限制。
方式四的情况二：
例一：
所述第二信息包括第一信息域和第二信息域，若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组被寻呼，且所述第二终端设备组未被寻呼，
所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域以及所述第四信息包括的信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M3个子组是否被寻呼；或，
所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M2个子组是否被寻呼，所述M2小于所述M3；或，
所述第一信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M1个子组是否被寻呼，所述M1小于所述M2；或，
所述第四信息用于指示以下情况中的任一项：所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示所述M2个子组是否被寻呼；或，所述第一信息域用于指示所述M1个子组是否被寻呼。
本申请实施例仍以所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组分别为RedCap UE组和normal UE组为例，假设第一终端设备组为RedCap UE组，第二终端设备组为normal UE组。
若RedCap UE组被寻呼，且normal UE组未被寻呼，则第二信息包括的信息域(即所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域)以及第四信息包括的信息域用于指示RedCap UE组包括的M3个子组是否被寻呼。
示例性地，若RedCap UE组被寻呼，且normal UE组未被寻呼，则第一信息域和第二信息域以及第四信息包括的信息域可以指示RedCap UE组包括的M3个子组是否被寻呼。在这种情况下，RedCap UE组可以包括的子组的个数大于上述用第一信息域和第二信息域或只用第一信息域指示RedCap UE组包括的子组的个数。例如，上述用第一信息域和第二信息域指示RedCap UE组包括的子组的个数为20，则在该情况下，利用第一信息域和第二信息域以及第四信息包括的信息域指示RedCap UE组包括的子组个数可以为22(假设第四信息包括的信息域有2个比特)，因此，第一信息域、第二信息域以及第四信息包括的信息域可以用于指示RedCap UE组包括的22个子组是否被寻呼。
若RedCap UE组被寻呼，且normal UE组未被寻呼，则第二信息包括的信息域(即所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域)用于指示RedCap UE组包括的M2个子组是否被寻呼。
示例性地，若RedCap UE组被寻呼，且normal UE组未被寻呼，则第一信息域和第二信息域可以指示RedCap UE组包括的M2个子组是否被寻呼。在这种情况下，RedCap UE组可以包括的子组的个数大于上述用第一信息域指示RedCap UE组包括的子组的个数。例如，上述用第一信息域指示RedCap UE组包括的子组的个数为10，则在该情况下，用第一信息域和第二信息域指示的RedCap UE组可以包括的子组个数为20，因此，第一信息域和第二信息域用于指示RedCap UE组包括的20个子组是否被寻呼。对于第四信息包括的信息域，可以设置为特定状态或被预留或用于指示其他功能，不予限制。
若RedCap UE组被寻呼，且normal UE组未被寻呼，则第二信息包括的第一信息域用于指示RedCap UE组包括的M1个子组是否被寻呼。
示例性地，若RedCap UE组被寻呼，且normal UE组未被寻呼，则第一信息域可以指示RedCap UE组包括的M1个子组是否被寻呼。例如，此时，RedCap UE组可以包括10个子组，则第一信息域用于指示RedCap UE组包括的10个子组是否被寻呼。对于第二信息域和/或第四信息包括的信息域，可以设置为特定状态或被预留或用于指示其他功能，不予限制。
若RedCap UE组被寻呼，且normal UE组未被寻呼，第四信息用于指示以下情况中的任一项：
所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示所述M2个子组是否被寻呼；或，
所述第一信息域用于指示所述M1个子组是否被寻呼。
示例性地，若RedCap UE组被寻呼，且normal UE组未被寻呼，则第四信息可以用于指示第一信息域和第二信息域指示RedCap UE组包括的M2个子组是否被寻呼。例如，此时，RedCap UE组可以包括20个子组，则第四信息可以用于指示第一信息域和第二信息域指示RedCap UE组包括的20个子组是否被寻呼。
示例性地，若RedCap UE组被寻呼，且normal UE组未被寻呼，则第四信息可以用于指示第一信息域指示RedCap UE组包括的M1个子组是否被寻呼。例如，此时，RedCap UE组可以包括10个子组，则第四信息可以用于指示第一信息域指示RedCap UE组包括的10个子组是否被寻呼。
本申请提供的方案，在第一终端设备组被寻呼且第二终端设备组未被寻呼的情况下，第一信息域和第二信息域以及第四信息包括的信息域可以动态指示被寻呼的第一终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼，可以灵活增加被寻呼的终端设备组的分组的数量，可以降低终端设备的寻呼虚警概率，进一步地，可以减少终端设备的功耗的浪费。
应理解，若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组未被寻呼，且所述第二终端设备组被寻呼，实施方式与如上描述类似，不再赘述。
例二：
所述第二信息包括一个信息域，若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组被寻呼，且所述第二终端设备组未被寻呼，
所述第二信息包括的信息域以及所述第四信息包括的信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组被划分的M3个子组是否被寻呼；或，
所述第二信息包括的信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组被划分的M2个子组是否被寻呼，所述M2小于所述M3。
本申请实施例仍以所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组分别为RedCap UE组和normal UE组为例，假设第一终端设备组为RedCap UE组，第二终端设备组为normal UE组。
若RedCap UE组被寻呼，且normal UE组未被寻呼，则第二信息包括的信息域以及第四信息包括的信息域用于指示RedCap UE组被划分的M3个子组是否被寻呼。
示例性地，若RedCap UE组被寻呼，且normal UE组未被寻呼，则第二信息包括的信息域以及第四信息包括的信息域可以指示RedCap UE组被划分的M3个子组是否被寻呼。在这种情况下，RedCap UE组可以被划分的子组的个数大于上述用第二信息包括的信息域中的部分比特(即a*N或N/a个比特)指示RedCap UE组被划分的子组的个数。例如，上述用第二信息包括的信息域中的部分比特指示RedCap UE组被划分的子组的个数为15(例如，假设a*N或N/a等于15)，则在该情况下，利用第二信息包括的信息域以及第四信息包括的信息域指示RedCap UE组被划分的子组个数可以为22(例如，假设第四信息包括的信息域有2个比特)，因此，第二信息包括的信息域以及第四信息包括的信息域可以用于指示RedCap UE组被划分的22个子组是否被寻呼。
若RedCap UE组被寻呼，且normal UE组未被寻呼，则第二信息包括的信息域用于指示RedCap UE组被划分的M2个子组是否被寻呼。
示例性地，若RedCap UE组被寻呼，且normal UE组未被寻呼，则第二信息包括的信息域可以指示RedCap UE组被划分的M2个子组是否被寻呼。在这种情况下，RedCap UE组可以被划分的子组的个数大于上述用第二信息包括的信息域中的部分比特(即a*N或N/a个比特)指示RedCap UE组被划分的子组的个数。例如，上述用第二信息包括的信息域中的部分比特指示RedCap UE组被划分的子组的个数为15(例如，假设a*N或N/a等于15)，则在该情况下，用第二信息包括的信息域指示的RedCap UE组可以被划分的子组个数为20，因此，第二信息包括的信息域用于指示RedCap UE组被划分的20个子组是否被寻呼。对于第四信息包括的信息域，可以设置为特定状态或被预留或用于指示其他功能，不予限制。
本申请提供的方案，在第一终端设备组被寻呼且第二终端设备组未被寻呼的情况下，第二信息包括的信息域以及第四信息包括的信息域可以动态指示被寻呼的第一终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼，可以灵活增加被寻呼的终端设备组的分组的数量，可以降低终端设备的寻呼虚警概率，进一步地，可以减少终端设备的功耗的浪费。
应理解，若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组未被寻呼，且所述第二终端设备组被寻呼，实施方式与如上描述类似，不再赘述。
方式四的情况三：
所述第二信息包括一个信息域或两个信息域，例如第一信息域和第二信息域，若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组均未被寻呼，
所述第二信息包括一个信息域或两个信息域以及所述第四信息包括的信息域中的至少一个被预留或设置为特定状态或用于指示其他功能。
本申请实施例仍以所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组分别为RedCap UE组和normal UE组为例，假设第一终端设备组为RedCap UE组，第二终端设备组为normal UE组。以下以第二信息包括第一信息域和第二信息域为例。
若第一信息指示RedCap UE组和normal UE组均未被寻呼，则第一信息域、第二信息域以及第四信息包括的信息域中的至少一个被预留或设置为特定状态或用于指示其他功能。
示例性地，第一信息域和第二信息域被预留，第四信息包括的信息域设置为特定状态或用于指示其他功能；或者，第一信息域和第四信息包括的信息域被预留，第二信息域设置为特定状态或用于指示其他功能；或者，第二信息域和第四信息包括的信息域被预留，第一信息域设置为特定状态或用于指示其他功能；不予限制。
应理解，所述特定状态可由协议预先定义或由网络设备半静态配置。
在一些实施例中，第四信息还可以用于指示第一终端设备组、第二终端设备组以及第三终端设备组所对应的信息域。
示例性地，若第一信息指示第一终端设备组、第二终端设备组以及第三终端设备组被寻呼，第二信息包括的第一信息域、第二信息域以及第三信息域分别用于指示第一终端设备组、第二终端设备组以及第三终端设备组被划分的子组是否被寻呼，其中，第二信息包括的用于指示第一终端设备组被划分的子组所对应的信息域、用于指示第二终端设备组被划分的子组所对应的信息域、以及用于指示第三终端设备组被划分的子组所对应的信息域可以利用第四信息动态指示。
若第一信息指示第一终端设备组和第二终端设备组被寻呼，且第三终端设备组未被寻呼，第二信息包括的第一信息域和第三信息域可以用于指示第一终端设备组被划分的子组是否被寻呼、第二信息域可以用于指示第二终端设备组被划分的子组是否被寻呼，其中，第二信息包括的用于指示第一终端设备组被划分的子组所对应的信息域和用于指示第二终端设备组被划分的子组所对应的信息域可以利用第四信息动态指示。
若第一信息指示第一终端设备组被寻呼，且第二终端设备组和第三终端设备组未被寻呼，第二信息包括的第一信息域、第二信息域和第三信息域可以用于指示第一终端设备组被划分的子组是否被寻呼，其中，第二信息包括的用于指示第一终端设备组被划分的子组所对应的信息域可以利用第四信息动态指示。
上述第一信息指示的终端设备组的数量仅为示例性说明，还可以用于指示多于3个终端设备组的终端设备组，例如，可以用于指示4个或5个终端设备组等，不予限制。
可选地，在一些实施例中，所述第三信息承载于第一DCI中，或第一媒体接入控制控制单元(mediaaccesscontrolcontrolelement，MAC CE)中，或RRC信令中；
所述第四信息承载于第二DCI中，或第二MAC CE中。
本申请实施例中的第三信息可以承载于RRC信令中，由网络设备半静态配置。或者，第三信息可以承载于第一DCI或第一MAC CE中，由网络设备动态指示。
其中，第三信息承载于第一DCI中时，可以和第一信息和/或第二信息位于同一个DCI，或不同的DCI。类似地，第四信息承载于第二DCI中时，可以和第一信息和/或第二信息位于同一个DCI，或不同的DCI，不予限制。
可选的，当所述第四信息和所述第二信息位于同一个第二DCI时，所述第四信息立即生效，即作用于同一个第二DCI中的第二信息，从所述第二信息包括的信息域中指示与所述第一终端设备组对应的信息域，和与所述第二终端设备组对应的信息域。
可选的，当所述第四信息和所述第二信息由不同的信令承载时，所述第四信息生效于之后的第二DCI中的第二信息，其生效时间直到终端设备收到下一个第四信息为止，则终端设备根据新收到的第四信息确定第二信息包括的信息域中与所述第一终端设备组对应的信息域，和与所述第二终端设备组对应的信息域。在第四信息的生效时间内，终端设备根据当前的第四信息确定第二信息包括的信息域中与所述第一终端设备组对应的信息域，和与所述第二终端设备组对应的信息域。
上文指出，终端设备在RRC_idle态或RRC_inactive态除了监听寻呼PDCCH，还会执行RRM测量。
其中，终端设备一般是从睡眠状态唤醒去监听寻呼PDCCH和RRM测量。在这之前，由于终端设备已经睡眠了较长时间，因此，终端设备一般会执行自动增益控制(automatic gain control，AGC)调整和时频同步。在多波束场景下，终端设备还可能执行波束选择。所以终端设备在RRC_idle态或RRC_inactive态的功率损耗主要包括如下几项：
(a)AGC调整，时频同步(time/frequency tracking)
(b)监听寻呼PDCCH(monitoring paging PDCCH)
(c)RRM测量(RRM measurement)
(d)监听多个波束进行波束选择(multi-beam monitoring for beam selection)
关于上述终端设备在RRC_idle或RRC_inactive态的4个功率损耗的内容，请参见下 文。
(a)AGC调整，时频同步
终端设备从长时间的深睡眠状态唤醒后，需要执行AGC调整和时频同步。终端设备可以通过接收参考信号实现AGC调整和时频同步。NR中，在RRC idle态或RRCinactive态，终端设备可以基于同步信号块(synchronization signal block，SSB)信号执行AGC调整和时频同步。NR中的SSB信号的周期较大，一般为20ms。最低可以是5ms，最高可以是160ms。
例如，终端设备在低信号与干扰加噪声比(signal to interference plus noise ratio，SINR)下可能需要2至3个SSB才能完成AGC调整和时频同步，而在高SINR下可能只需要1个SSB就能实现AGC调整和时频同步，或者在高SINR下，终端设备的时频误差和AGC偏移都较小，在容忍范围内，可以不再接收SSB执行AGC调整和时频同步，终端设备唤醒后可以直接在PO接收数据监测是否有寻呼DCI。
其中，高SINR表明有用信号的接收功率相对噪声功率和干扰功率较高，意味着信号较好。低SINR表明有用信号的接收功率相对噪声功率和干扰功率较低，意味着信号较差。
由于终端设备一般需要1至3个SSB才能完成AGC调整和时频同步，所以终端设备需要在PO之前提前较长时间唤醒，在SSB和SSB之间以及在SSB和PO之间维持浅睡眠或深睡眠。可见，终端设备需要唤醒多次(这涉及多次状态切换)，并且维持较长时间的唤醒/浅睡眠状态，这会使终端设备消耗很多功耗。
(b)监听寻呼PDCCH
监听寻呼PDCCH是为了接收短消息和寻呼消息，寻呼消息由寻呼PDSCH承载。其中，寻呼PDCCH承载寻呼DCI，寻呼DCI可能会调度寻呼PDSCH。短消息位于寻呼DCI中。
如果一个PO上有终端设备被寻呼，寻呼DCI会指示有寻呼消息，即寻呼DCI会调度一个寻呼PDSCH，否则，寻呼PDCCH没有PDSCH的调度信息。
如果一个终端设备被寻呼，在寻呼PDSCH中会承载该终端设备的信息，比如该终端设备的ID。终端设备在译码PDSCH之后，如果寻呼PDSCH承载的ID与自身的ID匹配，表明自己被寻呼，否则，该终端设备实际上是没有被寻呼的，是监听该PO的其他终端设备被寻呼。
(c)RRM测量
移动性RRM测量的目的是为了使处于RRC_idle态和RRC_inactive态的终端设备做小区选择/重选，以及为了使处于RRC连接(RRC_connected)态的终端设备做小区切换。
目前用作RRM测量的参考信号主要包括两种：SSB信号和信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information-reference signal，CSI-RS)信号。其中，SSB信号是小区级的信号，因此终端设备在RRC空闲态/非激活态/连接态都可以使用。而CSI-RS信号只能由处于RRC连接态的终端设备使用。
当终端设备处于RRC连接态时，基站可以通过RRC信令配置一定的CSI-RS资源用作移动性RRM测量，具体采用哪种信号做RRM测量，可以由RRC信令进行配置。而在终端设备处于RRC_idle态和RRC_inactive态时，只能基于SSB信号执行RRM测量。
当终端设备基于SSB信号进行RRM测量时，如果网络设备为终端设备配置了SSB 测量时间配置(measurement time configuration，SMTC)，则终端设备可以在SMTC窗口时间内执行RRM测量；如果终端设备没有被配置SMTC，则终端设备假设SSB的周期可以为5ms，终端设备可以在该5ms内执行RRM测量。
(d)波束选择
在NR的多波束场景下，一个同步信号突发集(SS burst set)中可以包含多个SSB，即SSB是以波束扫描的形式发送，寻呼PDCCH也是以波束扫描(beam-sweeping)的形式发出，即：一个PO由多个PDCCH监听时机组成，第k个PDCCH监听时机对应第k个实际发送的SSB。
终端设备可以认为寻呼DCI在多个波束中重复发送，具体选择哪一个波束接收寻呼DCI可以由终端设备实现。一般终端设备在监听寻呼PDCCH之前会基于参考信号(如SSB)做波束选择，然后在选择的波束对应的波束上监听寻呼PDCCH。如果终端设备不提前选择合适的波束，则终端设备为了保证不漏掉寻呼DCI会在多个PDCCH监听时机(即多个波束)上去监听寻呼PDCCH。可见，波束选择，和/或在多个PDCCH监听时机监听寻呼PDCCH会消耗终端设备较大的功耗。
因此，本申请可以通过不同的信道/信号承载上述第一信息和第二信息，详见下文。
可选地，在一些实施例中，寻呼提前指示信道/信号承载所述第一信息，寻呼PDCCH承载所述第二信息，寻呼提前指示信道/信号在时域上在所述寻呼PDCCH之前，或所述寻呼提前指示信道/信号和所述寻呼PDCCH位于相同的时隙(slot)或子帧(subframe)；或，所述寻呼提前指示信道/信号承载所述第一信息和所述第二信息包括的部分信息，所述寻呼PDCCH承载所述第二信息中除所述部分信息之外的信息。
本申请实施例中的寻呼提前指示信道/信号用于承载寻呼提前指示(paging early indication，PEI)。其中，寻呼提前指示信道/信号也可以称为唤醒信号(wake-up signal，WUS)，不予限制。
以为PEI为例，如图6所示为本申请实施例提供的一种终端设备在寻呼时机监听寻呼PDCCH的示意图。
参考图6中的(a)，可以看出，终端设备在监听寻呼PDCCH前，可以从深度睡眠状态唤醒去接收SSB，执行AGC调整和/或时频同步，如果SSB和PO之间的时间间隔较短，UE可能会在该时间间隔内切换至浅度睡眠状态，然后再在寻呼时机监听寻呼PDCCH。其中，终端设备处于深度睡眠状态时所消耗的功率小于处于浅度睡眠状态时所消耗的功率。
参考图6中的(b)，可以看出，在引入PEI之后，终端设备在监听PO之前可以先接收PEI，若PEI指示终端设备没有被寻呼，则终端设备可以直接进入深度睡眠状态以节省功率消耗。
如上所述，寻呼提前指示信道/信号可以用于承载PEI，寻呼PDCCH可以承载寻呼DCI，因此，本申请实施例中，PEI可以包括第一信息，寻呼DCI可以包括第二信息。PEI在时域上位于寻呼PDCCH之前，则第一终端设备在接收到PEI后，可以确定自己所在的第一终端设备组是否被寻呼，从而可以确定是否监听所述寻呼PDCCH。
示例性的，若PEI中的第一信息指示第一终端设备所在的第一终端设备组未被寻呼，则第一终端设备可以确定不监听所述寻呼PDCCH，从而，回到深度睡眠状态以节省功耗。
若PEI中的第一信息指示第一终端设备所在的第一终端设备组被寻呼，则第一终端设 备确定监听所述寻呼PDCCH，所述寻呼PDCCH会承载寻呼DCI，第一终端设备在接收的寻呼DCI中找到第二信息，从而根据第二信息的指示确定自己所在的子组是否被寻呼。若第二信息指示第一终端设备所在的子组被寻呼，则第一终端设备接收寻呼DCI调度的寻呼PDSCH，否则，第一终端设备可以不接收寻呼DCI调度的寻呼PDSCH，从而进入睡眠状态。应理解，根据如上的实施例描述，在某些实施例中，第二信息不用于第一终端设备组的分组指示，则第一终端设备只能确定自己所在的第一终端设备组寻呼，然后接收寻呼DCI调度的寻呼PDSCH。
应理解，终端设备以寻呼DRX周期周期性的监听寻呼PDCCH，引入PEI之后，终端设备也会周期性的监听寻呼提前指示信道/信号，所述寻呼提前指示信道/信号的周期可以为寻呼DRX周期的整数倍，例如等于1个寻呼DRX周期。
针对一个终端设备，该终端设备监听的一个寻呼提前指示信道/信号在相隔一个寻呼提前指示信道/信号的周期之后会存在第二个寻呼提前指示信道/信号，在这两个寻呼提前指示信道/信号之间存在该终端设备的PO，该终端设备在自己的PO监听寻呼PDCCH。
所述寻呼提前指示信道/信号在时域上在所述寻呼PDCCH之前，其中，所述寻呼PDCCH表示的是从所述寻呼提前指示信道/信号之后到所述寻呼提前指示信道/信号之后的下一个寻呼提前指示信道/信号之前的寻呼PDCCH，应理解，所述寻呼PDCCH是该终端设备要监听的寻呼PDCCH。
所以，若PEI中的第一信息指示第一终端设备所在的第一终端设备组被寻呼，则第一终端设备确定监听的所述寻呼PDCCH位于该PEI之后，且位于该PEI之后的下一个寻呼提前指示信道/信号之前，且所述寻呼PDCCH是第一终端设备在自己的PO要监听的PDCCH。
可选的，所述寻呼提前指示信道/信号和所述寻呼PDCCH位于相同的时隙或子帧。
示例性的，寻呼提前指示信道/信号和寻呼PDCCH的监听时机相同，即终端设备在监听寻呼PDCCH的PO处监听寻呼提前指示信道/信号。
本申请提供的方案，通过寻呼提前指示信道/信号(如PEI)承载第一信息，通过寻呼PDCCH承载第二信息，使得第一终端设备可以根据PEI中第一信息的指示，提前确定本身所在的终端设备组是否被寻呼，以确定是否监听寻呼PDCCH。当第一终端设备确定不监听寻呼PDCCH时，可以不必监听所述寻呼PDCCH，回到深度睡眠状态，从而可以进一步节省终端设备的功率消耗。另外，PEI只包括第一信息，可以节省PEI的信令开销，有助于降低PEI的块误码率(block error rate，BLER)，提高PEI的可靠性。
在一些实施例中，PEI可以包括第一信息，此外，PEI还包括第二信息的部分信息，寻呼DCI包括第二信息中除所述部分信息之外的信息。
示例性的，如上所述的实施例，第二信息包括第一信息域和第二信息域，第一信息域有Q1个比特，第二信息域有Q2个比特，PEI包括第一信息和所述第一信息域的Q1个比特，寻呼DCI包括所述第二信息域的Q2个比特。
若第一信息指示第一终端设备组被寻呼，则所述第一信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。同时，若第一信息指示第二终端设备组也被寻呼，所述第二信息域用于指示所述第二终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。
这样，第一终端设备不需要接收寻呼DCI就能确定本身所在的子组是否被寻呼，可以 提前确定是否监听所述寻呼PDCCH，有助于节省第一终端设备的功耗。
考虑到到RedCap UE对电池续航需求更高，所以RedCap UE越早知道自己是否被寻呼，越有利于RedCap UE节省功耗。因为，一旦RedCap UE知道自己未被寻呼，就可以提前进入睡眠状态节省功耗。因此，示例性的，第一终端设备组可以是RedCap UE组，第二终端设备组可以是Normal UE组。
可选的，若第一信息指示第一终端设备组未被寻呼，且指示第二终端设备组被寻呼，则所述第一信息域用于指示所述第二终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼；或，所述第二信息域用于指示所述第二终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼；或，所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示所述第二终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。
当然，本申请实施例同样也适用于多个两个终端设备组的终端设备组。示例性地，第一信息可以用于指示第一终端设备组、第二终端设备组以及第三终端设备组是否被寻呼，第二信息可以用于指示这3个终端设备组包括的子组是否被寻呼。
若第一信息指示第一终端设备组和第二终端设备组被寻呼，则所述第一信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼，所述第二信息域用于指示所述第二终端设备组被划分的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。在PEI包括第一信息的情况下，第一终端设备和第二终端设备不需要接收寻呼DCI就能确定本身所在的子组是否被寻呼，可以提前确定是否监听所述寻呼PDCCH，有助于节省功耗。
本申请提供的方案，通过寻呼提前指示信道/信号承载第一信息和第二信息的部分信息，可以使得所述部分信息域对应的终端设备提前确定本身所在的终端设备子组是否被寻呼，以确定是否监听寻呼PDCCH。这样，对于对功耗更加敏感的终端设备，可以在降低其寻呼虚警概率的同时，使其尽早得知自己是否被寻呼。当终端设备确定自己未被寻呼时，可以尽早回到深度睡眠状态，从而可以进一步节省终端设备的功率消耗。
在一些实施例中，PEI可以包括所述第一信息和所述第二信息。在这种情况下，所述第一终端设备根据所述第二信息确定是否监听寻呼PDCCH。
这样，任意终端设备根据接收的PEI中的第一信息和第二信息，就可以确定自己所在的终端设备组或终端设备子组是否被寻呼。若确定自己所在的终端设备组或终端设备子组未被寻呼，则可以避免监听所述寻呼PDCCH，尽早回到睡眠状态以节省功耗。
在另一些实施例中，寻呼DCI包括所述第一信息和所述第二信息。在这种情况下，所述第一终端设备根据所述第二信息确定是否接收寻呼PDSCH。
示例性的，寻呼DCI中的短消息指示域(short message indicator field)对应第一终端设备组，用于指示第一终端设备组是否被寻呼，寻呼DCI中的预留比特中的其中1个比特用于指示第二终端设备组是否被寻呼，也就是说，第一信息包括短消息指示域和所述1个比特。例如，以Normal UE组和RedCap UE组为例，短消息指示域对应Normal UE组，所述1个比特对应RedCap UE组。当短消息指示域设置为状态“01”或“11”时，表示Normal UE组被寻呼，当短消息指示域设置为“00”或“10”时，表示Normal UE组未被寻呼。当所述1个比特设置为“1”时，表示RedCap UE组被寻呼，当所述1个比特设置为“0”时，表示RedCap UE组被寻呼。可选的，寻呼DCI中的预留比特中除所述1个比特之外的2个或多个比特用于承载第二信息。
如上所述，寻呼DCI用于调度寻呼PDSCH。若终端设备确定自己所在的终端设备组或终端设备子组未被寻呼，则可以避免接收或解析寻呼PDSCH，尽早回到睡眠状态以节省功耗。若终端设备确定自己所在的终端设备组或终端设备子组被寻呼，则终端设备需要接收寻呼PDSCH。
可选地，在一些实施例中，所述第一终端设备和所述第二终端设备在相同的PO监听相同的寻呼PDCCH，和/或，所述第一终端设备和所述第二终端设备监听相同的寻呼提前指示信道/信号。
示例性的，第一终端设备和第二终端设备是相同的设备类型，第一终端设备和第二终端设备共享相同的寻呼提前指示信道/信号资源，且共享相同的寻呼PDCCH资源。即，第一终端设备和第二终端设备监听相同的寻呼提前指示信道/信号，在需要监听寻呼PDCCH时(例如，若第一信息指示第一终端设备所在的终端设备组或子组被寻呼，且第二终端设备所在的终端设备组或子组也被寻呼)，第一终端设备和第二终端设备会在相同的或不同的PO监听寻呼PDCCH。
示例性的，第一终端设备和第二终端设备是不同的设备类型，第一终端设备和第二终端设备共享相同的寻呼提前指示信道/信号资源，且共享相同的寻呼PDCCH资源。即，第一终端设备和第二终端设备监听相同的寻呼提前指示信道/信号，在需要监听寻呼PDCCH时(例如，若第一信息指示第一终端设备所在的终端设备组或子组被寻呼，且第二终端设备所在的终端设备组或子组也被寻呼)，第一终端设备和第二终端设备会在相同的PO监听寻呼PDCCH。
示例性的，第一终端设备和第二终端设备是不同的设备类型，第一终端设备和第二终端设备共享相同的寻呼提前指示信道/信号资源，但不共享寻呼PDCCH资源。即，第一终端设备和第二终端设备监听相同的寻呼提前指示信道/信号，在需要监听寻呼PDCCH时(例如，若第一信息指示第一终端设备所在的终端设备组或子组被寻呼，且第二终端设备所在的终端设备组或子组也被寻呼)，第一终端设备和第二终端设备会在不同的PO监听寻呼PDCCH。
示例性的，第一终端设备和第二终端设备是不同的设备类型，第一终端设备和第二终端设备不共享寻呼提前指示信道/信号资源，但共享相同的寻呼PDCCH资源。例如，第一终端设备监听寻呼提前指示信道/信号，也监听寻呼PDCCH，第二终端设备只监听寻呼PDCCH。
应理解，本申请中，若一个终端设备组或子组被指示被寻呼，表明该终端设备组或子组中存在至少一个终端设备被寻呼。若一个终端设备组或子组被指示未被寻呼，则这个终端设备组或子组中的所有终端设备均未被寻呼。
本申请中，一个信息或一个信息域指示至少两个子组是否被寻呼，或指示M个子组是否被寻呼，包含多种实现方式，具体的实现方式可由网络设备半静态配置或由协议预先定义，不予限制。
示例性的，假设存在M个子组，用于指示该M个子组是否被寻呼的信息域有Q个比特。有如下实现方式：
实现方式一：Q等于M。
即，用于指示所述M个子组是否被寻呼的信息域包含的比特个数Q等于子组的个数 M。这样，每个比特可以对应一个子组，用于指示所对应的子组是否被寻呼。
例如，第二信息包括的信息域有4个比特，第二信息用于指示第一终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼，则第二信息可以指示4个子组是否被寻呼，那么第一终端设备组包括的终端设备会被划分到4个子组中。
例如，第一终端设备组包括20个UE，在某些划分方式中，这20个UE被划分到子组1至子组4，每个子组包括5个UE。或者，根据不同的划分方式，这20个UE只被分到子组1和子组2，每个子组包括10个UE，子组3和子组4不包括任何终端设备。
实现方式二：Q小于M。
M个子组是否被寻呼共包括2 M的M次幂)个情况，例如，M个子组中只有子组1被寻呼称为1个情况，M个子组中子组1和子组2被寻呼，其他子组未被寻呼称为另1个情况。但有些情况不单独指示，例如对于其中Y个情况，这Y个情况其中发生任意一个情况时，都对应Q个比特包括的同一个状态，这样，可以用小于M的Q个比特指示M个子组是否被寻呼。例如，某些情况出现的概率较低，例如，M个子组中出现2个子组被寻呼或超过2个子组被寻呼的概率较低，所以如果出现这样的情况，不需要单独指示。
例如，Q＝3，这3个比特用于指示第一终端设备组包括的4个子组是否被寻呼。所述Q个比特包括的比特状态的含义如下表2所示。
表2
Figure PCTCN2021072284-appb-000002
本方式中，可以用较少的比特个数指示较多的子组是否被寻呼，可以节省比特信令开 销。
本申请中，不同的终端设备如何被划分为多个终端设备组，包含多种实现方式，具体的实现方式可由网络设备半静态配置或由协议预先定义，不予限制。
示例性的，根据一种或多种特征，将终端设备划分为多个终端设备组。
所述一种或多种特征可由网络设备半静态配置或协议预先定义。
示例性的，监听同一个PO的UE被划分到同一个终端设备组。
应理解，监听同一个PO的不同UE针对某一种特征可能有不同的特征值。例如，RedCap UE和Normal UE监听同一个PO，并被划分到同一个终端设备组。
具体的，相邻的R个PO关联一个PEI指示，该PEI包括的第一信息用于指示监听所述R个PO的终端设备是否被寻呼。所述R个PO可以位于同一个寻呼帧，或位于多个寻呼帧。在所述R个PO中，监听同一个PO的终端设备属于同一个终端设备组，监听不同的PO的终端设备属于不同的终端设备组。所述第一信息用于指示所述R个终端设备组是否被寻呼。作为一个例子，针对其中一个终端设备组，若第一信息指示所述终端设备组被寻呼，第二信息用于指示所述终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。所述第二信息可以位于所述PEI中，或位于所述终端设备组包括的终端设备在自己的PO监听的寻呼DCI中。
所述R为大于或等于2的正整数。
本申请中，一个终端设备组如何被划分为至少两个子组，包含多种实现方式，具体的实现方式可由网络设备半静态配置或由协议预先定义，不予限制。
示例性的，针对一个终端设备，网络设备通过非接入层(Non-Access Stratum,NAS)信令或RRC信令配置子组ID。
示例性的，网络设备配置或协议预先定义一个终端设备组包括的子组个数M，然后根据终端设备的ID和子组个数计算出终端设备所属的子组ID。例如，根据如上所述公式(3)可以计算出终端设备所属的子组ID。
图7和图8为本申请的实施例提供的可能的通信装置的结构示意图。这些通信装置可以实现上述方法实施例中终端设备或网络设备的功能，因此也能实现上述方法实施例所具备的有益效果。在本申请实施例中，该通信装置可以是如图1所示的终端设备20或终端设备30或终端设备40，也可以是如图1所示的网络设备10，还可以是应用于终端设备或接入网设备的模块(如芯片)。
图7是本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置900的示意性结构图，该装置900可以包括收发模块910和处理模块920。
当通信装置900用于实现图5所述方法实施例中网络设备的功能时，所述收发模块910，用于发送第一信息，所述第一信息用于指示第一终端设备所属的第一终端设备组是否被寻呼。所述收发模块910还用于发送第二信息，若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组被寻呼，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。
当通信装置900用于实现图5所述方法实施例中终端设备的功能时，所述收发模块910用于接收第一信息和第二信息，所述第一信息用于指示所述第一终端设备所属的第一终端设备组是否被寻呼。若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组被寻呼，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼，所述处理模块920还用于 根据所述第二信息确定是否接收寻呼PDSCH，或确定是否监听寻呼PDCCH。
关于上述收发模块910和处理模块920更详细的描述，可参考上述方法实施例中的相关描述，在此不再说明。
如图8所示，通信装置1000包括处理器1010和接口电路1020。处理器1010和接口电路1020之间相互耦合。可以理解的是，接口电路1020可以为收发器或输入输出接口。可选的，通信装置1000还可以包括存储器1030，用于存储处理器1010执行的指令或存储处理器1010运行指令所需要的输入数据或存储处理器1010运行指令后产生的数据。
当通信装置1000用于实现上述方法实施例中的方法时，处理器1010用于执行上述处理模块920的功能，接口电路1020用于执行上述收发模块910的功能。
当上述通信装置为应用于终端设备的芯片时，该终端设备芯片实现上述方法实施例中终端设备的功能。该终端设备芯片从终端设备中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线)接收信息，该信息是网络设备发送给终端设备的；或者，该终端设备芯片向终端设备中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线)发送信息，该信息是终端设备发送给网络设备的。
当上述通信装置为应用于网络设备的芯片时，该网络设备芯片实现上述方法实施例中网络设备的功能。该网络设备芯片从网络设备中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线)接收信息，该信息是终端设备发送给网络设备的；或者，该网络设备芯片向网络设备中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线)发送信息，该信息是网络设备发送给终端设备的。
可以理解的是，本申请的实施例中的处理器可以是中央处理单元(central processing unit，CPU)，还可以是其它通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor，DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit，ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array，FPGA)或者其它可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件，硬件部件或者其任意组合。通用处理器可以是微处理器，也可以是任何常规的处理器。
本申请的实施例中的方法步骤可以通过硬件的方式来实现，也可以由处理器执行软件指令的方式来实现。软件指令可以由相应的软件模块组成，软件模块可以被存放于随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)、闪存、只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM，PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM，EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM，EEPROM)、寄存器、硬盘、移动硬盘、CD-ROM或者本领域熟知的任何其它形式的存储介质中。一种示例性的存储介质耦合至处理器，从而使处理器能够从该存储介质读取信息，且可向该存储介质写入信息。当然，存储介质也可以是处理器的组成部分。处理器和存储介质可以位于ASIC中。另外，该ASIC可以位于接入网设备或终端设备中。当然，处理器和存储介质也可以作为分立组件存在于接入网设备或终端设备中。
在上述实施例中，可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机程序或指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序或指令时，全部或部分地执行本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其它可编程装置。所述计算机程序或指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者通过所述计算机可读存储介质进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是集成一个或多个可用介质的服务器等数据存 储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质，例如，软盘、硬盘、磁带；也可以是光介质，例如，数字多功能光盘(digital versatile disc，DVD)；还可以是半导体介质，例如，固态硬盘(solid state disk，SSD)。
在本申请的各个实施例中，如果没有特殊说明以及逻辑冲突，不同的实施例之间的术语和/或描述具有一致性、且可以相互引用，不同的实施例中的技术特征根据其内在的逻辑关系可以组合形成新的实施例。
本申请中，“至少一个”是指一个或者多个，“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”，描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B的情况，其中A，B可以是单数或者复数。在本申请的文字描述中，字符“/”，一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系；在本申请的公式中，字符“/”，表示前后关联对象是一种“相除”的关系。
可以理解的是，在本申请的实施例中涉及的各种数字编号仅为描述方便进行的区分，并不用来限制本申请的实施例的范围。上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定。

Claims (36)

  1. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第一终端设备接收第一信息和第二信息，所述第一信息用于指示所述第一终端设备所属的第一终端设备组是否被寻呼；
    若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组被寻呼，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼，所述第一终端设备所属的子组是所述至少两个子组中的一个，所述第一终端设备根据所述第二信息确定是否接收寻呼物理下行共享信道PDSCH，或确定是否监听寻呼物理下行控制信道PDCCH。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组不被寻呼，则所述第二信息用于指示所述至少两个子组是否被寻呼且所述第二信息不生效，所述第一终端设备确定不接收所述PDSCH或确定不监听所述PDCCH。
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一信息还用于指示第二终端设备所属的第二终端设备组是否被寻呼。
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第二信息包括第一信息域和第二信息域，所述第一信息域为所述第一终端设备组对应的信息域，所述第二信息域为所述第二终端设备组对应的信息域；
    若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组均被寻呼，所述第一信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M1个子组是否被寻呼，所述第二信息域用于指示所述第二终端设备组包括的N1个子组是否被寻呼；或，
    若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组被寻呼，且指示所述第二终端设备组未被寻呼，所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M2个子组是否被寻呼，且所述M2大于所述M1。
  5. 根据权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一终端设备接收第三信息，所述第三信息用于指示所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组的分组指示优先级，所述分组指示优先级用于确定优先被第二信息分组指示的终端设备组；
    所述第一终端设备根据所述第二信息确定是否接收寻呼PDSCH，或确定是否监听寻呼PDCCH，包括：
    所述第一终端设备根据所述第二信息和所述第三信息确定是否接收所述PDSCH，或确定是否监听所述寻呼PDCCH。
  6. 根据权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组的分组指示优先级是由协议预先定义的。
  7. 根据权利要求5或6所述的方法，其特征在于，若所述第一终端设备组的分组指示优先级高于所述第二终端设备组，
    若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组被寻呼，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼；或，
    若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组未被寻呼，且指示所述第二终端设备组被寻 呼，所述第二信息用于指示所述第二终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。
  8. 根据权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一信息包括的第P个字段对应第一终端设备组，第Q个字段对应第二终端设备组，所述P和Q为正整数，所述P小于Q，
    若所述第P个字段为目标状态，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼；
    若所述第P个字段为非目标状态，所述第Q个字段为目标状态，所述第二信息用于指示所述第二终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。
  9. 根据权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一终端设备接收第四信息，若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组均被寻呼，所述第四信息用于指示与所述第一终端设备组对应的信息域，和与所述第二终端设备组对应的信息域；
    所述第一终端设备根据所述第二信息确定是否接收寻呼PDSCH，或确定是否监听寻呼PDCCH，包括：
    所述第一终端设备根据所述第二信息和所述第四信息确定是否接收所述寻呼PDSCH，或确定是否监听所述寻呼PDCCH。
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二信息包括第一信息域和第二信息域，若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组均被寻呼，
    若所述第四信息包括的信息域为第一状态，所述第四信息指示所述第一信息域与所述第一终端设备组对应，且所述第二信息域与所述第二终端设备组对应，所述第一信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M1个子组是否被寻呼，所述第二信息域用于指示所述第二终端设备组包括的N1个子组是否被寻呼；或，
    若所述第四信息包括的信息域为第二状态，所述第四信息指示所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域与所述第一终端设备组对应，所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M2个子组是否被寻呼，所述M2大于所述M1。
  11. 根据权利要求9所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二信息包括第一信息域和第二信息域，若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组均被寻呼，
    若所述第四信息包括的信息域为第三状态，所述第四信息指示所述第一信息域与所述第一终端设备组对应，且所述第二信息域与所述第二终端设备组对应，所述第一信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M1个子组是否被寻呼，所述第二信息域用于指示所述第二终端设备组包括的N1个子组是否被寻呼；或，
    若所述第四信息包括的信息域为第四状态，所述第四信息指示所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域与所述第一终端设备组对应，所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M2个子组是否被寻呼，所述M2大于所述M1；或，
    若所述第四信息包括的信息域为第五状态，所述第四信息指示所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域与所述第二终端设备组对应，所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示所述第二终端设备组包括的N2个子组是否被寻呼，所述N2大于所述N1。
  12. 根据权利要求9至11中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二信息包括第一信息域和第二信息域，若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组被寻呼，且所述第二终 端设备组未被寻呼，
    所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域以及所述第四信息包括的信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M3个子组是否被寻呼；或，
    所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M2个子组是否被寻呼，所述M2小于所述M3；或，
    所述第一信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M1个子组是否被寻呼，所述M1小于所述M2；或，
    所述第四信息用于指示以下情况中的任一项：
    所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示所述M2个子组是否被寻呼；或，
    所述第一信息域用于指示所述M1个子组是否被寻呼。
  13. 根据权利要求9至12中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二信息包括第一信息域和第二信息域，若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组均未被寻呼，
    所述第一信息域、所述第二信息域以及所述第四信息包括的信息域中的至少一个被预留或设置为特定状态或用于指示其他功能。
  14. 根据权利要求5或9至13中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第三信息承载于第一下行控制信息DCI中，或第一媒体接入控制控制单元MAC CE中，或无线电资源控制RRC信令中；
    所述第四信息承载于第二DCI中，或第二MAC CE中。
  15. 根据权利要求1至14中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，寻呼提前指示信道/信号承载所述第一信息，寻呼PDCCH承载所述第二信息，所述寻呼提前指示信道/信号在时域上在所述寻呼PDCCH之前，或所述寻呼提前指示信道/信号和所述寻呼PDCCH位于相同的时隙或相同的子帧；或，
    所述寻呼提前指示信道/信号承载所述第一信息和所述第二信息包括的部分信息，所述寻呼PDCCH承载所述第二信息中除所述部分信息之外的信息。
  16. 根据权利要求3至15中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一终端设备组包括的终端设备的特征相同，所述第二终端设备组包括的终端设备的特征相同，所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组包括的终端设备的特征不同，所述特征包括如下至少一种：
    终端设备的类型、终端设备对功耗的敏感度、终端设备的被寻呼概率。
  17. 根据权利要求3至16中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一终端设备和所述第二终端设备在相同的寻呼时机PO监听相同的寻呼PDCCH，和/或，
    所述第一终端设备和所述第二终端设备监听相同的寻呼提前指示信道/信号。
  18. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    网络设备发送第一信息，所述第一信息用于指示第一终端设备所属的第一终端设备组是否被寻呼；
    所述网络设备发送第二信息，若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组被寻呼，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的方法，其特征在于，若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端 设备组不被寻呼，所述第二信息用于指示所述至少两个子组是否被寻呼且所述第二信息不生效。
  20. 根据权利要求18或19所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一信息还用于指示第二终端设备所属的第二终端设备组是否被寻呼。
  21. 根据权利要求20所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第二信息包括第一信息域和第二信息域，所述第一信息域为所述第一终端设备组对应的信息域，所述第二信息域为所述第二终端设备组对应的信息域；
    若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组均被寻呼，所述第一信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M1个子组是否被寻呼，所述第二信息域用于指示所述第二终端设备组包括的N1个子组是否被寻呼；或，
    若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组被寻呼，且指示所述第二终端设备组未被寻呼，所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M2个子组是否被寻呼，且所述M2大于所述M1。
  22. 根据权利要求20所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述网络设备发送第三信息，所述第三信息用于指示所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组的分组指示优先级，所述分组指示优先级用于确定优先被分组指示的终端设备组。
  23. 根据权利要求20所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组的分组指示优先级是由协议预先定义的。
  24. 根据权利要求22或23所述的方法，其特征在于，若所述第一终端设备组的分组指示优先级高于所述第二终端设备组，
    若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组被寻呼时，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼；
    若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组未被寻呼，且指示所述第二终端设备组被寻呼时，所述第二信息用于指示所述第二终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。
  25. 根据权利要求20所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一信息包括的第P个字段对应第一终端设备组，第Q个字段对应第二终端设备组，所述P和Q为正整数，所述P小于Q，
    若所述第P个字段为目标状态，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼；
    若所述第P个字段为非目标状态，所述第Q个字段为目标状态，所述第二信息用于指示所述第二终端设备组包括的至少两个子组是否被寻呼。
  26. 根据权利要求20所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述网络设备发送第四信息，若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组均被寻呼，所述第四信息用于指示与所述第一终端设备组对应的信息域，和与所述第二终端设备组对应的信息域。
  27. 根据权利要求26所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第二信息包括第一信息域和第二信息域，若所述第一信息指示第一终端设备组和第二终端设备组均被寻呼，
    若所述第四信息包括的信息域为第一状态，所述第四信息指示所述第一信息域与所述第一终端设备组对应，且所述第二信息域与所述第二终端设备组对应，所述第一信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M1个子组是否被寻呼，所述第二信息域用于指示所述第二终端设备组包括的N1个子组是否被寻呼；或，
    若所述第四信息包括的信息域为第二状态，所述第四信息指示所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域与所述第一终端设备组对应，所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M2个子组是否被寻呼，所述M2大于所述M1。
  28. 根据权利要求26所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二信息包括第一信息域和第二信息域，若所述第一信息指示第一终端设备组和第二终端设备组均被寻呼，
    若所述第四信息包括的信息域为第三状态，所述第四信息指示所述第一信息域与所述第一终端设备组对应，且所述第二信息域与所述第二终端设备组对应，所述第一信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M1个子组是否被寻呼，所述第二信息域用于指示所述第二终端设备组包括的N1个子组是否被寻呼；或，
    若所述第四信息包括的信息域为第四状态，所述第四信息指示所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域与所述第一终端设备组对应，所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M2个子组是否被寻呼，所述M2大于所述M1；或，
    若所述第四信息包括的信息域为第五状态，所述第四信息指示所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域与所述第二终端设备组对应，所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示所述第二终端设备组包括的N2个子组是否被寻呼，所述N2大于所述N1。
  29. 根据权利要求26至28中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二信息包括第一信息域和第二信息域，若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组被寻呼，且所述第二终端设备组未被寻呼，
    所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域以及所述第四信息包括的信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M3个子组是否被寻呼；或，
    所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M2个子组是否被寻呼，所述M2小于所述M3；或，
    所述第一信息域用于指示所述第一终端设备组包括的M1个子组是否被寻呼，所述M1小于所述M2；或，
    所述第四信息用于指示以下情况中的任一项：
    所述第一信息域和所述第二信息域用于指示所述M2个子组是否被寻呼；或，
    所述第一信息域用于指示所述M1个子组是否被寻呼。
  30. 根据权利要求26至29中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二信息包括第一信息域和第二信息域，若所述第一信息指示所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组均未被寻呼，
    所述第一信息域、所述第二信息域以及所述第四信息包括的信息域中的至少一个被预留或设置为特定状态或用于指示其他功能。
  31. 根据权利要求22或26至30中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第三信息承载于第一下行控制信息DCI中，或第一媒体接入控制控制单元MAC CE中，或无线电资源控制RRC信令中；
    所述第四信息承载于第二DCI中，或第二MAC CE中。
  32. 根据权利要求18至31中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，寻呼提前指示信道/信号承载所述第一信息，寻呼PDCCH承载所述第二信息，所述寻呼提前指示信道/信号在时域上在所述寻呼PDCCH之前，或所述寻呼提前指示信道/信号和所述寻呼PDCCH位于相同的时隙或相同的子帧；或，
    所述寻呼提前指示信道/信号承载所述第一信息和所述第二信息包括的部分信息，所述寻呼PDCCH承载所述第二信息中除所述部分信息之外的信息。
  33. 根据权利要求20至32中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一终端设备组包括的终端设备的特征相同，所述第二终端设备组包括的终端设备的特征相同，所述第一终端设备组和所述第二终端设备组包括的终端设备的特征不同，所述特征包括如下至少一种：
    终端设备的类型、终端设备对功耗的敏感度、终端设备的被寻呼概率。
  34. 根据权利要求20至33中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一终端设备和所述第二终端设备在相同的寻呼时机PO监听相同的寻呼PDCCH，和/或，
    所述第一终端设备和所述第二终端设备监听相同的寻呼提前指示信道/信号。
  35. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括处理器和通信接口，所述通信接口用于接收来自所述通信装置之外的其它通信装置的信号并传输至所述处理器或将来自所述处理器的信号发送给所述通信装置之外的其它通信装置，所述处理器通过逻辑电路或执行代码指令用于实现如权利要求1至17或18至34中任一项所述的方法。
  36. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序，当所述计算机程序被运行时，实现如权利要求1至17或18至34中任一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2021/072284 2021-01-15 2021-01-15 通信方法和装置 WO2022151405A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2021/072284 WO2022151405A1 (zh) 2021-01-15 2021-01-15 通信方法和装置
CN202180062465.8A CN116114327A (zh) 2021-01-15 2021-01-15 通信方法和装置

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2021/072284 WO2022151405A1 (zh) 2021-01-15 2021-01-15 通信方法和装置

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022151405A1 true WO2022151405A1 (zh) 2022-07-21

Family

ID=82446889

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/072284 WO2022151405A1 (zh) 2021-01-15 2021-01-15 通信方法和装置

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN116114327A (zh)
WO (1) WO2022151405A1 (zh)

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101765213A (zh) * 2008-12-23 2010-06-30 鼎桥通信技术有限公司 一种增加训练序列分配灵活性的方法
US9699624B1 (en) * 2016-07-21 2017-07-04 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Access network group paging for end devices
CN111200870A (zh) * 2020-01-07 2020-05-26 展讯通信（上海）有限公司 通信方法及装置

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101765213A (zh) * 2008-12-23 2010-06-30 鼎桥通信技术有限公司 一种增加训练序列分配灵活性的方法
US9699624B1 (en) * 2016-07-21 2017-07-04 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Access network group paging for end devices
CN111200870A (zh) * 2020-01-07 2020-05-26 展讯通信（上海）有限公司 通信方法及装置

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
MEDIATEK INC.: "Paging Enhancements for Idle/Inactive-Mode UE Power Saving", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-2008964, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. e-Meeting; 20201026 - 20201113, 24 October 2020 (2020-10-24), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051946752 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN116114327A8 (zh) 2024-05-28
CN116114327A (zh) 2023-05-12

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2021013104A1 (zh) 一种唤醒信号wus检测方法及装置
WO2021062612A1 (zh) 通信方法及装置
CN111903166B (zh) 一种信号发送方法、网络设备及终端设备
EP3952193A1 (en) Method for transmitting signal, terminal device, and network device
WO2020030088A1 (zh) 一种信息检测方法、通信设备与计算机可读存储介质
WO2022204871A1 (en) Methods, apparatus and systems for monitoring a control channel
US20230345370A1 (en) System and method for pdcch monitoring
CN116248241A (zh) 一种通信方法及设备
US20230108137A1 (en) Paging indication method and related apparatus
US20230309061A1 (en) Wireless communication method, terminal, and network device
WO2022199489A1 (zh) 双drx模式下唤醒指示方法及相关装置
US20220060985A1 (en) Method for detecting control channel and terminal device
KR20210081931A (ko) 무선 통신 시스템에서 단말의 전력 소모 감소 방법 및 장치
WO2021163890A1 (zh) 通信方法、通信装置及计算机可读存储介质
WO2020143747A1 (zh) 通信方法和装置
WO2021097648A1 (zh) 检测物理下行控制信道pdcch的方法以及装置
WO2022151405A1 (zh) 通信方法和装置
WO2022022742A1 (zh) 一种寻呼方法及装置
WO2018177179A1 (zh) 一种寻呼消息的发送方法、接收方法、基站及终端
US20220322231A1 (en) Tracking reference signal enhancements for new radio
WO2020088455A1 (zh) 通信方法和通信装置
WO2022067828A1 (zh) 寻呼信息发送、监听方法及通信装置、系统
WO2023130392A1 (zh) 一种无线通信方法及装置、终端设备、网络设备
WO2024067294A1 (zh) 下行控制信息的传输方法和装置
WO2022141304A1 (zh) 参考信号的指示方法和装置、计算机可读存储介质及计算机程序

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21918609

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21918609

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1